Dictionary of Prakrit for Jain Literature Vol 01 Fasc 01

Author(s): A M Ghatage
Publisher: Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute
Catalog link: https://jainqq.org/explore/020316/1

Page #1

A COMPREHENSIVE AND CRITICAL
DICTIONARY OF THE PRAKRIT LANGUAGES
WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO JAIN LITERATURE
Volume One Fascicule I
General Editor A. M. GHATAGE
Retired Professor of General Linguistics, University of Poona,
AND
Ex-General Editor, An Encyclopaedic Dictionary of Sanskrit on Historical Principles
BHANDARKAR ORIENTAL RESEARCH INSTITUTE, POONA, INDIA 1993
Price Rs. 150/

Page #2

A COMPREHENSIVE AND CRITICAL
DICTIONARY OF THE PRAKRIT LANGUAGES
WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO JAIN LITERATURE
Volume One Fascicule !
General Editor A. M. GHATAGE
Retired Professor of General Linguistics, University of Poona,
AND
Ex-General Editor, An Encyclopaedic Dictionary of Sanskrit on Historical Principles
BHANDARKAR ORIENTAL RESEARCH INSTITUTE,
POONA, INDIA 1993

Page #3

Copyright, Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, Poona
STITUT
POONA
FOUNDED 1917
॥ तेजस्वि नावधीतमस्तु ॥ //
Printed at: The Bhandarkar Institute Press, Poona Published by R. N. Dandekar, Honorary Secretary, Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, Poona

Page #4

A COMPREHENSIVE AND CRITICAL DICTIONARY OF THE PRAKRIT LANGUAGES WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO JAIN LITERATURE
enerowak O Lue Ponce covenangis
VOLUME ONE
FASCICULE I
Prepared by the staff of the Prakrit Dictionary Department, Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, Poona (India), with the financial support of the Sanmati Teerth, Poona (a Trust devoted to Prakrits and Jainology), the University Grants Commission, and the Ministry of Human Resource Development, Government of India.

Page #5

EDITORIAL STAFF
General Editor A. M. GHATAGE
Editoriol Assistants
G. B. PALSULE MEENAKSHI KODNIKAR
NALINI JOSHI KAMALKUMAR K, JAIN
The Project of the Prakrit Dictionary is sponsored by Shri N, K. FIRODIA. Professor A, M. GHATAGE and the staff of the Prakrit Dictionary Department of the Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute have prepared the Dictionary with the financial support of the Sapmati Teerth, a Trust of which Shri N. K. FIRODIA is the Chairman and Shri U. K. PUNGALIYA, Advocate, is the Honorary Secretary. The Trust has received the following donations for the Prakrit Dictionary Project.
List of Donors of the Sanmati Teerth
(1) Shri N. K. FIRODIA, Pune
(Ahmednagar Health Foundation )
Rs. 7,00,000-00 Rs. 2,00,000-00
(2) Shri U, K, PUNGALIYA, Advocate, Pune
(3) Sbri SHRENIKBHAI KASTURBHAI, Abmedabad
(Shri Shwetambar Moortipoojak Jain Boarding )
Rs.
1,00,000-00
(4) Shri ABHERAJ H. PALDOTA, Wadala, Bombay
(Abheraj Baldota Foundation )
Rs. 1,00,000-00
Rs. 11,00,000-00
Pripted at the Bhandarkar Institute Press, Poona, with the financial assistance from the Ministry of Human Resource Development, Government of India, and Sbri N. K. FIRODIA, Chairman, and Shri U. K. PUNGALIYA, Honorary Secretary, Sanmati Teerth, Poona.

Page #6

PREFACE
The project of preparing and publishing a compre- a Dictionary of Frakrits'. This Note was widely circubensive dictionary of the Prakrit languages, mainly lated among Indian and foreign scholars interested in based on the extensive Jain literature in Prakrit, was Prakrit studies, in order to elicit their opinions and first thought of by Shri N. K. Firodia, Chairman of the suggestions. The plan also rougbly indicated the time Sapmati-Teerth, an academic institute newly started required for the completion of the work : three to four by a group of Jains in Pune city, with the inten- years for the collection of material and about ten years tion of promoting Prakrit studies, which were generally for the preparation and publication of the dictionary in neglected so far. They approached me in connection about three volumes. It was pointed out that, like with the planning of the academic work of the Institute. other works of similar nature, the dictionary would be A meeting was held in Poona for this purpose at the published in the form of fascicules. end of 1986, and, out of the two essential requirements of Prakrit studies, namely, a detailed comparative gra- For the implementation of the Project, & small mmar of all the Prakrit languages and a comprehensive unit of workers was set up at the Institute, which and critical dictionary, the latter was chosen for early consisted, besides the General Editor, of three to four execution, because of its greater necessity and useful- editorial assistants, and the extraction of words from the Dess. During the last fifty years, the urgency of such Prakrit works was carried on with their help. An ina work was often voiced in various seminars and confer- dependent library unit was also created, most of the ences, and the Prakrit Text Society also had thought of books having been taken from the library of the such a plan. But no adequate arrangment could be made Institute. Additional books were borrowed from other to bring such a project in practice.
libraries in Poona, some were purchased, a few wore got
xeroxed, and some were donated to the project. At The authorities of the Sanmati-Teerth asked me to
present there are about 500 original works in the undertake the work of planning and executing this dic
library of the Project, which are used for extraction of tionary-project, which made it necessary for me to come
material, and about 300 secondary works dealing with the to Poona from my native place, a small village in the
Prakrit languages and Jain literature, religion, philosophy district of Kolhapur where I bad lived since my retire
and a few other related topics. It is felt that this ment as the Chief Editor of the Sanskrit Dictionary
collection will be adequate for the dictionary, and the Project of the Deccan College Post-graduate and Research
addition of recent publications will be continued. Institute, Poona, in 1983. To avoid delay, it was also thought necessary to establish and locate the project
After the extraction of material bad reached an at the Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, Poona, advanced stage and the excerpts had reached the number because of its reputation as one of the foremost losti- of four lakhs, the material was alphabetized and made tutes working in the field of Indological studies and ready for the editorial work. Also because of its excellent library and press facilities. With a view to enabling the Bhandarkar Institute to In 1989 a detailed questionnaire on some 80 spoclundertake the project, Shri N. K. Firodia, Chairman of fic points pertaining to 11 main aspects of the mechanism the Sanmati-Teerth, made to the Institute an initial grant of dictionary-making was prepared and circulated among of Rs. five lakhs for this purpose.
Prakrit scholars in India and outside, and a fairly good Accordingly the work on the project was begun at
response was received particularly from foroiga scholars
showing keen interest in such a work. the Institute on the 1st of April 1987, when I came to
In 1991, A
specimen forme of eight pages was prepared and again Poona, and took charge as Honorary General Editor of
circulated among scholars. The numerous suggestions the Dictionary.
thereby received having been duly taken into account, A detailed plan of the proposed dictionary indicat. the methodology of the dictionary was finalised. The ing the nature and scope of the work, the method to actual printing of the dictionary was begun in April be adopted for its implementation, the problems involved 1992, and the first fascicule of the dictionary containing in it, and other relevant matters was prepared and in- detailed introduction and the DOCONSAry Ancillary corporated into A Note on the Nature and Scope of material is now being published.

Page #7

(vi)
On behalf of the project, I convey my sincere thanks to Professor R. N. Dandekar, Honorary Secretary of the Bhandarkar Institute and to Shri N. K. Firodia and Shri U. K. Pungaliya, the Chairman and the Secretary of the Sanmati-Teerth, whose devotion to the Prakrit studies and whose academic and financial help have made the execution of the project possible. My thanks are also due to the members of the staff of the Project who have spared no pains to meet the heavy demands made on them; to the following scholars who answered the questionnaire and made many valuable suggestions, K. S. Arjunwadkar, Poona; N. Balbir, Paris; H. Berger, Heidelberg; W. B. Bollee, Heidelberg; J. Bronkhorst, Lausanne; G. Cardona, Pennsy Ivania University; L. A. Van Daalen, Utrecht; G. L. Amar, New Delhi; P. M. Joseph, Thumba; Jain Vishva Bharati, Ladnun; C. G. Kashikar, Poona; B. K. Khada badi, Shankeshwar; R. A Koch, München; Chr. Lindtner,
Denmark; Sadhvi Manjushri, Poona; C. Mayrhofer, Canberra; M. A. Mehendale, Poona; H. Nakamura, Tokyo; K. R. Norman, Cambridge; E. C. Polome, Texas University; A. Radichi, Italy; M. S. Ranadive, Satara; H. P. Schmidt, Los Angeles; N. M. Sen, Poona; R. Norton Smith, Toronto; S. Suridev, Patna; W. J. Wright, London; G. Wojtilla, Budapest; - to the following persons for their voluntary work in connection with the extraction of words, Mrs. R. R. Mohadikar, J. G. Keskar, Muni Pravinarushiji, Mrs. S. S. Lunavat and Mrs. V. R. Bhatewarao; - to the following Institutions for lending books, Fergusson College, Poona, Deccan College Post-Graduate and Research Institute, Poona, Wadia College, Poona and Seva Mandir, Raut Jodhpur.
Finally I express my thanks to the office-staff of the Bhandarkar Institute and to the Institute's Press who did their work in an excellent and expeditious manner.
A. M. Ghatage General Editor

Page #8

CONTENTS
Preface
Introduction
Abbreviations of Books quoted in the Dictionary
Abbreviations used in the Bibliography
Language- and Subjectwise Classification with Approximate Chronology of the Works
Grammatical and General Abbreviations ...
Languages
Symbols ...
Other Abbreviations
Dictionary of the Prakrit Languages
...
240
V-VI
1-25
I-XXV
XXV-XXVII
XXVII-XXXIII
XXXIV
XXXV
XXXVI
XXXVI

Page #9

Page #10

INTRODUCTION
1. THE TITLE
A
The full title of the present lexical work is Comprehensive and Critical Dictionary of the Prakrit Larguages with special reference to Jain literature'. This designation is chosen to indicate the main features of the work. Compared to the available dictionaries of the Prakrits, old and new. this dictionary is intended to cover all the available leximes in the Prakrit languages and as such aims at comprehensiveness as far as the Prakrit literature is concerned It is meant to be critical in the sense that while using the literature for this purpose. a critical : ttitude is consistently followed, and each item is examined and all quotations for it are thoroughly corrected wherever necessary with all the available material, and are fully interpreted. This is essential because most of the Prakrit works which are at present available are not critically edited and properly translated. In the case of editions of the canonical texts, there are too many differences among them, because they are published at different times and are worked with divergent principles. which are often contrary to each other. being based upon different views of their nature Equally chaotic is the method used for the purpose of giving references to passages and many of the entries are based on memory of the dictionarymakers. Sometimes an attempt is made to put a Sanskrit word into Prakrit without any thought being given to its actual occurrence in the Prakrit language. Short of preparing complete critical editions of the works used for this dictionary, an attempt is made to present the words and examples in as critical a form as possible with the available material A consistent and easily verifiable mode of reference is used which will help the reader to trace the passages in different editions. The meanings given are based on a thorough consideration of all the evidence available including the traditional interpretations and for this purpose extracts from the commentarial literature are given in their proper places with references. By the expression Prakrit languages it is intended to take the word in the sense in which it has been used in Indian Classical literature as a whole and more particularly its use as found in the traditional Prakrit grammars, works on rhetorics and dramaturgy. In this sense the word Prakrits is not co-extensive with what the modern linguists c 11 the Middle IndoAryan languages (MIA). Hence we exclude from the
scope of this work the whole of the Pali literature and extra-Indian Prakrit dialects and some of the early inscriptions in MIA like those of Aśoka. This exclusion is based on two considerations: (1) excellent dictioparles are available for Pali literature and an exhaustive one is already in progress. Glossaries for the excluded dialects and inscriptions are also known and meet the needs sufficiently well. (2) Technically the different modes of writing of these dialects make it difficult to include the words in the alphabetical order of the Prakrit Dictionary and their inclusion as separate entries will only increase the bulk of the work without real advantage. However, whenever an etymology of the Prakrit word is attempted, this material is given intended to draw attention to the fact that an extensive due consideration The reference to Jain literature is of the peculiar and technical words from this literature material is available here and that the semantic analysis is expected to yield a rich harvest and is in need of some amount of special explanation to understand them. in the history of Indo-Aryan languages fully justifies The position which the Apabhramśa literature occupies its inclusion in the Dictionary. All the material bearing on the so-called Vibhāṣās' sub-dialects of Prakrits' being scanty will be included in the scope of this work. But the bulk of the Dictionary will be formed by the chief Prakrit languages namely Ardha-Magadhi, Jain Mabaraṣṭrī, Jain-Sauraseni, Mähäräsṭrl, Sauraseni, Magadhi and Apabhrama and illustrations from them will be used throughout. A complete list of books used for this tions used and the mode of reference followed. It Dictionary is given separately along with the abbreviacontains nearly 500 works and thus covers almost all the material available in the Prakrit languages.
II. LEXICAL MATERIAL IN PRAKRIT
For a better understanding of the nature of the present dictionary, it may be useful to give a brief survey of the lexical material available for the Prakrits included in this dictionary. As compared with Sanskrit and Pali, the traditional lexical material for the Prakrits is definitely scanty and not of much significance. It is true that the vast comment rial literature on the AMg. canon and post-canonical works both in JM. and JS. often cite a few passages which appear like bits of Kosas of the traditional type, just as they quote a few

Page #11

(2)
grammatical rules which have given rise to the hope of The device used to arrange the words is equally finding old grammars of Prakrit written in Prakrit simple which explains the limitations placed on the itself, as is the case with the Pali language. But choice of words. Synonyms which number many but in both cases the expectation is not justified. In the not exceeding a gātnā are given first, then those which earliest exegetical works in AMg. and Pro-cancpical can be accomodated in one line, or one carana or the works in JS. and more particularly in the so-called fourth part of a gātnā, two lines of which are divided into Nijjuttis and Bbāsas, where such bits of statements occur. two parts each of unequal length. The list is concluded those are due to the tradition of these works to explain with words with their meanings in a single word. the texts in a peculiar manner. Of the various devices It can be easily imagined that such a plan would give used to elucidate the meanings of the sacred texts, there very little scope both for the number of words to be is one called egaphas i. e. giving words ail of which included and the explanations to be given for them have the same meaning. As the idea is to classify Hence its use for a Prakrit lexicographer is very little. the concept which underlies a word more than its oxact sense, these bits of egatthas are built on a
On the other hand the Desībāmamälā of Hemavory loose idea of synonyms and a collection of
candra is of capital importance for Prakrit lexicography. words is put together to include as many aspects of
While the tat-8ıma and at bhava words of Prakrit are the concept as possible, which can hardly be called a
easily identified with their Sanskrit counterparts and Kosa as usually understood in Ancient Indian literature. offer no difficulty of explanation, the socalled Deli A fairly evolved example of this can be seen at the words, which occur throughout the Prakrit literature, beginning of cach chapter of the late canonical book are enigmatic as regards their source, and often their Panhāvāgaranās. In the very first chapter we come meaning cannot be decided, wben not extensively used. across the word pānivaha and its 30 dames like Hemacandra has devoted one Kosa of his to collect and pānivaham, ummuland sarirão, avisambho. hımsavhi explain this stock of words in his work originally called mad, akiccam, ghayana, māraiņā, vahanā, uddhavana, Rayanävali but renamed by its first editor R. Pischel tivāvanā, ārumblus-ramarambho etc. called gonnāni As Desināmamälä as being more expressive of its nature. nāmāni. Tbo Nijjutti on the Suyagadu gives purely It consists of eight chapters called virgas based on the phonetic variants of its name as: toss yn imānu nāmānt division of the alphabet into groups according to a nonsuttagadam, sultakadam, suyagadain cere gouvai 2. grammatical astrological tradition of India A K The later work called Angavujjä abounds in such collec- 72509fa f u fa stie Achattar p. 272. This tions of synonyms and a modern work called Ekārtha.
to work called Elar ha. divides the alphabet into vowels from 37 to , ka-varga, kusu puts them together. In spite of the usefulness of ca varga, ţa-wirya, ta-vargé pa-varya, and ya varga. such passages, they can hardly be called Kolas or excerpts Hemacandra has split the last one into two, the first trom Kosas in the usual sense of the term as seen in a containing W. , and u, the second 8, 8. and h. very large number of works in Sanskrit beginning with Naturally the Dest words do not show the sounds the work of Amara. Real Kosas in this sense are only visirga, nasals n, ñ and y initially and hence they are two, Dhanapala's Pāialucchināmamālā and Rutnávali not necessary for arranging the words on the basis of (later known by the name Desināmamala) of Hema- their initial sounds. He remarks 2735171227 Atafaa candra. The first is a small work of 279 gathās and gafar af faar: p. 203; HITEL THAswang at 1 7 : deals with nearly a thousand words in Prakrit containing seara p. 236; aghaifi Tata **a gft anza: mostly cursa mas apd tadbhavas along with a few Desigrąua p 313. Besides arranging the words in the alpbawords. The author tells us at the end of the work that betical order of the first syllable he turther arranges them he composed it in VS. 1329 and mentions a famous according to the number of syllables they contain, i.e. incident which occurred in that year, viz. the town of as having two, three, four or five syllables in each Manyakbeta was attacked and looted by the king of group and this is again repeated twice on the consiMälavā. The author himselt lived in Dhärā and wrote deration, whether they are having a single meaning his Kośa for his sister Sundari He also indirectly gives or many (ekartha, anekartha) The ekārtha group his name in a line by the simple device of listing words, naturally includes words having the same meaning, the opd-syllables of which make up his name Dhanavāla. a synonymous kosa, while the other is a polysemous The choice of the words is made on the basis of Kosa. This brings his classification in conformity with their usefulness for writing poetry. It is obvious that the basic division of the Sanskrit Kośa works. Hema. he wants his work to be considered as an aid 10 poets, candra has put together as many as 6000 words of this which thus belongs to the genre called Kavisksā.
pature in 783 stanzas.

Page #12

(3)
a quotation from Vacaspatya. Its use in Prakrit is unknown. It quotes long passages from Prakrit works along with the Sanskrit commentary on them when available and even whole chapters are included in this respect. This procedure accounts for its bulk. It is more of the nature of an encyclopaedia and includes both Prakrit and Sanskrit material, which the author considers as useful for studying the Jain canonical works and their commentaries. It is obviously modelled on Sanskrit works like the शब्दकल्पद्रुम and the वाचस्पत्य and as such has both the merits and short-comings of these works.
In spite of its obvious defects, the work has been carefully scanned to get some items and meanings which are not otherwise available. The material utilised is mostly based on the memory of the author and the MSS. used were not critically edited. Its bulk bas certainly affected the judgements of both F. W. Thomas and W. Schubring when they speak of this work in their reviews of 1924 and 1935. The strictures passed on it by Pt. Hargovind Das Seth in the preface of his Dictionary in 1928 appear to be not fully justified, as claimed there that the name of a work of Yagovijaya अज्झत्थमयपरिक्खा in Prakrit is coined by the author.
To nis text he has added a Sanskrit commentary explaining the meanings of these words and illustrates their use in a large number of stanzas composed by himself. Pischel is very critical about these as having no literary merit, even after giving due consideration to the constraints under which they were composed. In spite of this limitation they are often of use in deciding the me nings of words when they are polysemous in Sanskrit itself and hence they are often cited for this purpose in the dictionary.
Hemacandra makes two more points worth noting.
He explicitly says that he has not included in bis work numerous words current in different parts of the country on the ground that they are too many to be listed. He has confined himself to such words as are actually found used in Prakrit literature. He also defines what he means by Desi qualitatively in his stanza 3. There he lays down the criteria that they should not be justifiable by the rules of grammar, or not known to Sanskrit lexicons and not justifiable by interpreting their sense by the device of a figurative or transferred meaning. More particularly words derived from the socalled a are also excluded. He thus makes a distinction between Desi words not derived from Sanskrit words and Dhatvadeśas which are not genetically connected with Sanskrit roots, a distinction which is reflected in the further history of such words in the modern Indian languages.
All the modern Dictionaries of Prakrits are arranged on the alphabetical principle, but the way in which the alphabet is arranged differs from dictionary to dictionary. Particularly in the treatment of the Anusvāra no definite
principle is followed and hence groups of words involving this sound are found at different places in these dictionaries. Nor is the principle followed by a particular dictionary used consistently throughout and herce the Anusvära, if it occurs in the middle of a word, is not given the same treatment as is given to it, if it occurs in the first syllable of a word.
The largest modern dictionary which professes to deal with Prakrits is called Abbidhanarajendra, composed by Vijayarajendrasuri (1826-1906), edited by his two pupils Dipavijaya and Yatindr vijaya and published between 1910 and 1924, in seven folio volumes and contains more than 9000 pages of a large size in two columns. The lemmata are given in Prakrit, but that does not mean that all such words actually occur in the Prakrit literature. For example the entry on page 3 is based on its Sanskrit counterpart far and its meaning as current in the Mimamsa is given with
The author has used about a hundred books in Prakrit and Sanskrit and has also listed the words under which the bulk of the information is to be found in the introduction. But their number is very small. The introduction also includes the whole of the Prakrit grammar of Hemacandra with a new commentary in Sanskrit verses written by the author, which however gives no new information.
During the thirties of this century two more
dictionaries of Prakrit were published. Unlike the work mentioned above, they were planned as regular dictionaries of the modern type, arranged alphabetically and the meanings of the words explained with a few The various meanings which the words examples. conveyed are systematically numbered and separated from each other. The usual parts of speech are indicated and the verbal bases are clearly marked. The words are collected from the literature and they are given with their Sanskrit equivalents based on the rules of changes of sounds which the Prakrit grammarians have formulated. Of these two, the Ardha-Magadhī dictionary was planned to include all the words in the Jain Svetämbara canon or sacred books, overlooking the legitimacy of the books called Prakirņakas. All the 45 books, which form the canon, were utilised. However, in spite of the fact that Ardba-Magadhi as a Prakrit is confined to the canonical works only, some other

Page #13

(4)
works like the six Karmagrantbas, Kammapayadi, years and more, and a second edition of it was published the Viseşāvasyakabbasya, the Pancasaka and Supā. in 1961. More recently an abridged edition of the same gapābacariya were included. The reasons for this is for the use of students was issued under the same name. hard to find. Originally planned by a non-academician The abridgement was mainly done by dropping a fair Mr. Bhandari, who gives a graphic description of the number of words, mostly derivatives or compound difficulties met by the project during its execution, the forms, which can be easily produced by the rules of basic work was prepared by the monk Shri Rata candji grammar, Oiherwise all the three editions are identical Maharaja, a versatilo Sanskrit scholar tamous for his in every respect and no attempt was made to either extraordinary memory, containing an estimated 50,000 correct its mistakes or modernise it by additional words taken from the canonical books, who also gave material. their meanings, both common and technical, in Gujarati. As the plan originally conceived had decided to give the
This work consists of about 1000 pages, each page meanings in three languages, Gujarati, Hindi and
having three columns, and includes about 75000 words. English, in order to have the dictionary a wider
Meanings are given in Hindi and citations are few, a few circulation, the Gujarati meanings were rendered into
more references being added to them. It uses as many as the other two languages with the help of a number
170 books and represents the major Prakrit dialects of scholars who themselves were not acquainted with
except works from Jain Sauraseni. However TVATATT the original texts and bence worked under a real and 89 are included, the purpose of which handicap. The bulk of the dictionary, which consists
remains unexplained. Only a few Apabhramsa works of four volumes with a total of more than three thousand
were used for the simple reason that most of them were pages is primarily due to this trilingual translations published after the Dictionary was completed. Citations and the actual lexical items are far less than can be
from the Maharastri epics are given mostly by a mere expected from the bulk of the work. Most of the short. reference to the name of the book, when they have a comings of the dictionary are due to the way in which the word index. (Probably the index to Setubandha was not plan was carried out in very adverse circumstances. It availab
available to the author.) The dramatic Prakrits are appears that the original intention to confine the work to poorly represented and only an unpublished list of technionly the Ardha-Magadbi Prakrit as found in the canon,
cal Prakrit terms in the dramas was made use of, and which is also apparent from the fact that a new grammar
bence other words of the dramatic Prakrits were not of this Prakrit was prepared by Dr. Banarasi Das and
included. In fact this bas become a good dictionary for given at the begioning, was altered and a fifth volume of
nd a fifth volume of
the three la
the three Prakrits, Ardha-Vagadbi, Jain Mabarastri and 857 pages was added, which included all the words wbich Maharastri. were found in the Păiasaddamabannavo of Pandit Har
All Prakrit words are followed by their Sanskrit govinddas Seth. This was done with the intention of
equivalents, but no attempt is made to include their making it cover all the Prakrit dialects, but which were not
etymology and often the Sanskrit givea does not appear found in the first four volumes. The words in this fifth
to be correct according to the Sanskrit grammar. All volume are given with only a Gujarati rendering. This
words taken from the Desin imamala are called Desi, bas deprived the dictionary of the possibility of giving all
even when they have easily ascertainable Sanskrit the meanings a word has, at one place, a great in
cognates. convenience for the user. The use of uncritical editions of the books, the insufficiency of the references given
From the technical point of view the dictionary which makes it often impossible to trace them and lack leaves much to be desired The abbreviations of the of first-hand knowledge of the source material on the works show that no uniform principle is followed : somepart of the numerous translators, have made the work less times the name of the work is abbreviated; sometimes useful in comparison with its bulk and the labour spent the name of the author. Thus the hymn Rsabha pancaon it. Quite recently the whole work is reprinted as it sikä is indicated by Dbana which is an abbreviation of is, without making any attempt to remedy even its scribal the author's name Dhanapala. pi stands for Piscbel to mistakes.
refer to the famous work Grammatik der Prakrit.
Sprachen. The collection of the Prakrit stories prepared The other Dictionary of the Prakrits of the twenties is by H. Jacobi is indicated by the siglum maha, because the most frequently used work called Paiasaddamahannavo, they are said to have been in Mähärastri, a double compiled by Pt. Hargovinddas Seth all alove. This confusion. There are many such curiosities which make work has served its purpose well during the last 60 it difficult for the reader to remember the abbreviations.

Page #14

(5)
The references are quite accurate when they are with the commentaries written on them and incidentally taken from the works which the author himself has a few non-canonical works like Dasaveyalıyacundi, edited as in the case of Visesăvašyıkabhâsya or Sura- Paumacariya of Vimala, Uvaesamalá of Dharmadása, sundar ikatha. The game is true of the voluminous work Tattvarthasūtra of Umāsvāti along with his so-called Paumac iriya of Vimaja. On the other hand, references Svopajña Bhasya and Visesavasyakabhāsya of Jinato works like V yavahāra or BȚhatkal pa are very in- bhadra. The later volumes were edited by Sagarānanda's sufficient, the number of the uddesas alone being pupil Kancanasågara. given and in many other cases only the name of the book is all that is found. When MSS. are used it is
Though intended to deal with the words found in but natural that the author could not give the reference
tho Agama texts, which ara less known as is indicated to tolio, side and line, unless he also specified the exact
in the title, the work is fairly comprehensive as far as MS. which he bas used.
the canon is concerned. By the word Alpa-paricita,
it appears, the author took it to mean, not generally A long introduction of 64 pages is added which
found in the classical Sanskrit literature or less known contains a detailed grammar of the Prakrit in general outside the Sanskrit works written by the Jain scholars. and the characteristic teatures of the various Prakrit dialects like Sauraseni, Magadhi, Paisaci, Cüliká-Paigācī The real peculiarity of the work lies in the fact and Apabbramsa, in which the author follows very that it is a Prakrit-Sanskrit dictionary which also includes close y tbe Grammar of Hemacandra.
a fair amount of Sanskrit words occurring in the While giving the meanings of words, Dumbers 1, 2,
commentaries and their explanations given there. As an
editor of the texts of the Agamodayasamiti, one can 3 etc. are used to indicate their different senses. But
well understand the procedure which the author has in most cases, lack of examples on which this was
followed. For each word included (either in Sanskrit based makes it very difficult to decide their correctness.
or Prakrit ), he adds by way of explanation the The author has put great faith in the traditional inter
relevant statements of the commentators in Sanskrit as pretation given in the commentaries in Sanskrit, wbich
they are actually found in the editions. As the same has led him admit meanings which cannot be justified.
word occurs in a number of canonical books, the author But it must be admitted that, in spite of the deficiencies
has put together the explanations offered by the different of the work, it is the only dictionary of Prakrits taken
commentarors and even by the same commentator at as a whole and it has served its purpose well during
diferent places. The references again are in the form the last 60 years and more.
of the number of the folio ( the side being pot indicated) The only other dictionary which needs to be referred because nearly all the books are in the form of folioto is a publication called Alpa paricita-Saiddhāntika- bundles or pothis As is to be expected from the sabdakosa consisting of five parts, published between 1954 editor of these books, the page number is mostly accurate and 1979 thus taking 25 years to complete. It contains and one can locate the word and its explanation by a total number of 1256 pages and an additional supple- reading at most the two sides of the folio. ment of 56 pages devoted to listing the words of the
The author has made no attempt to weigh the Desipamamalā of Hemacandra in an alphabetical order
explanations offered by the commentators and bas not with the meanings assigned to them by Hemacandra
suggested bis own views in this matter. But this is not himself, and hence has no independent value.
an important loss because the reader bas before him all This work is prepared by Muni Sāgarāpanda, a the excerpts which he needs for this purpose. This profound student of the Jain Agamas, and responsible method often gives rise to some problems like a choice of for the editions of the major works of the canon along the meaning among the divergent explanations in with the Sanskrit commentaries publisbed by the Sanskrit. For example ambadei in Uttarādnyayuna is Agamodayasamiti These are the only reliable editions explained by the word (iruskurute and in the Avašyaka available today for many of these works. The commen- by u palabhate. When a word like ainsalaga is explained taries on the canonical works were written by Haribhadra, as ainsagata, the etymological or derivational process Silanka, Hemacandra, Abbayadeva, Malayagiri, Santi- gets obscured because the word consists of the stem suri, Dronácārya and Candrasuri, covering a period of ansala and ga from the root gam-, wbile in the other more than five hundred years, which was mostly devoted the stem is anisa and the other element is gata- & past to the writing of Sanskrit commentaries. This dictionary passive participle of the same root gam-. When u patyan takos roto of all the 45 books of the canon along in Viy, is explaiged with the words anatica, unadstath,

Page #15

(6) ajñātikam, rnätitam and anātitam, the reader can make III. LINGUISTIC BACKGROUND OF up his mind only by going through the original texts.
THE DICTIONARY When the Prakrit form uggei is explained as āgneyi,
To understand the derivations and etymologies (tan gafafa) at Avašyaka 315, the other form
given in the dictionary, it is quite pecessary to keep in aggeyi as agnikoni at Bhagvati 493 and Thānanga
mind the exact position the Prakrit dialects occupy in 133, difficulties arise because of the lack of context,
the general development of the Indo-Aryan languages wbich become clear only when we go to the originals and
Frequent references will have to be made to the earlier look at the whole context. Aggibhūi is explained as
stages of the languages as also to the later developments Agnidyocajiva at Ava. 172. When the passage is read
which the Prakrits have undergone. It is also necessary in full one realises that Agnibhūts bad a number of
to fix the scope of each Prakrit used for this work and lives one after another and one of them was Agnidyuta,
to indicate which works are included under a given a Brabmin, hence the explanation ought to mean the
name. It is bardly possible to explain the derivation of soul of Agnidyua Brahmin' which was the same as that
Prakrit words without comparing them with their OIA. of Aynibhüls.
equivalents and numerous words can only be understood In spite of all such curiosities, the work is a very
in the light of their use in the NIA, languages. Hence a useful compilation to serve as an index not only to the
brief survey of the development of Indo-Aryan is given canonical texts but also to the voluminous Sanskrit
below. Relation of the Prakrit words with those found commentaries, which could not have been done by any in the
in the other Indo-European languages is rarely found and one else better than Sagaraganda, who carefully edited only incidentally discusse all these works over a life-time.
1. Historical Linguistics There is also a fair amount of lexical material for The science of language has succeeded in establishsome dialects of Prakrit which should be noted here. ing what is called the genealogical classification of This material is in the form of indices and glossaries with languages and thus grouping them into different families. or without meanings, some of them being also without This idea ot a family of languages is mainly based on an exact reference to the passages of the works on historical facts. As it is chiefly a historical concept, which they are based. In this regard a reference should according to which a parent language undergoes succesbe made to the indices of the Ardha-Magadhi canon sive changes resulting into the emergence of divergent published from Ladoun and to the indices of individual but related languages at a later stage in which each works, attached to the editions published in the Jain member of the family is, in reality, nothing but & more Agama series published from Bombay. But even here no or less modified form of the original speech, the method uniform plan has been followed and the original divisions which can legitimately help build up such groups capof the canonical works into Srutaskandbas, Adhyāyas, not but be historical, in which the earlier stages of the Udde sakas and Sutras is beglected. In both these given languages are followed upto their common original publications the Prakiraakas are neglected. Most of the form. In the absence of such material, however, the published Apabbramsa texts possess good word-indices comparative mezhod bas to be used either to supplement and recently an attempt is made to put them together in it or, in rare cases, to take its place. We compare languone work called a dictionary of Apabhramśa. Unfortu- ages as regards their geographical location, their inherited nately the compiler has not taken trouble to avoid the vocabulary (Daturally excluding borrowed words ), deficiencies and mistakes of the individual indices and inflectional peculiarities, types of syntactical groupings bas simply repeated them in bis work. Unipdiced works and, above all, phonetic correspondences amenable to have been simply beglected, thus impairing its value. more or less rigid application, to show their relatedness. Another small dictionary confined to the works of But the extreme modifications, which a language may Kundakunda in Jain Sauraseni is also available and is undergo in course of its evolution, make this procedure of some use.
only lead to results of a positive nature. We can provo In view of this situation the present dictionary
two languages as related but cannot assert that any two
languages were not so related in the past. has made it a point to scan all the words in these works and particularly the Ardba-Magadh Dictionary, If the similarities found in the languages help us in tho Päiasaddamahanavo and the Alpa-paricita-saiddhān- grouping them into families, sometimes of wide extent, the tika-sabda kośa and to indicate their differences or mis. facts of common innovation lead us to put two or more takes under the corresponding words of its own. languages into a more compact group, torming A sub

Page #16

(*7)
division of the bigger family. A language grows and assumes different forms, and each one of them may further repeat the same process. Thus we can well speak of the genealogy of a language with its nearer and distant relations, provided we remember that this is, after all, a figurative way of expression.
2. Indo-Aryan Languages
The Indo-Aryan languages (so called to emphasise the fact that they are of Aryan descent and belong to India, so as to be distinguished from other languages of Non-Aryan descent of the country and from Aryan languages current outside Irdia) belong to the Indo-European (IE.) family (possibly itself forming a branch of an older family with Hittite). which includes other groups like the Hellenic, Italic, Keltic, Germanic, Slavic etc. They form an important branch of the Aryan group along with the Iranian branch with the inclusion of a possible intermediate group called Dardic. In the Indo-Iranian group itself the two main branches differ from each other more on account of innovations and rapid changes on the side of the Iranian larguages than on the part of the Indo-Aryan group which on the whole shows itself more conservative.
The changes on the Indo-Aryan side, though less radical, are of greater importance to us. They include the change of as and au to e and o (Sk. véda Av. veda, Sk roáyati Av. raocayeiti); of ai and au into as and au; the change of palatal z, zh into j, h Sk. yajute Av. yazuite, Sk hásta Av. zasta); the loss of voiced sibilants like z. ž (Sk néchstha Av. nazdišta Sk. duruklám Av dužūxtum); the creation of a new series of retroflex sounds including the nasal and the sibilant $; the creation of groups like cch and ks from various earlier groups. In morphology we have the form náma 1st per. pro Gen. sing. for mana of Avesta; the roct brito speak for the original mru and many analogical forms like the 1st per. act. thematic ending 12. The two branches also differ in the treatment cfr (Sk. sakit Av. hak rat) and in the grade of the termination of the medial present part. (weak in Av. mna: bura mna, strong in Sk. -māna, bháramāņa).
While most of these early stages are reconstructed with the help of the comparative method we are on more secure ground when we enter the history of the IA. languages. From Rgveda (RV.) onwards we have a mass of documentary evidence marking the different stages in the growth of these languages. But the evidence is of varying value. Based on broad considerations, it is customary to divide the history of these languages into three stages, which are not strictly chro
nological in view of the fact that languages of the earlier stage continued to be artificially cultivated after they bad become purely literary idioms. Thus we speak of the OIA. or Sanskrit, the MIA. or Prakrit and the NIA. or the stage of the modern languages. The OIA. includes the Vedic language (wherein we can distinguish the language of RV. and of the other Samhitas), the Classical Sanskrit (of Panini-Patanjali), the Epic language (of the Mahabharata and the Rāmāyaṇa), the Sanskrit of the Jains and Budhists and what we can infer about the spoken idioms of those days. The whole of this group derives its unity more on account of a rigid and well defined phonetic pattern to be adhered to, than common morphological structure, which on the contrary, shows a steady process of growth and simpli. fication. This is strongly brought out by the attempts of later writers at hypersanskritisation and the use of such foreign words only as are in agreement with the Sanskrit phonetic system. Even then each one of these speeches has its own features which distinguish it from the others Naturally the majority of them are grammatical as distinct from phonological.
The MIA. group includes a number of languages and ming the next stage in the growth of the Indo-Aryan. dialects, all showing a strong family likeness and forThese languages can be arranged into different groups according to the purpose for which they were used (those used for religious preaching and those for secular literature like dramas. epics ard popular tales), according to locality of the dialects on which they are based (those of the North, of the Midland, of the East and South), according to the form in which they are preserved for us (as literary, inscriptional and on other monuments like coins and idols) and chronological according to the more or less archaic or developed forms shown by them. Each one of these classifications bas its value and helps us in judging the linguistic nature of the Prakrits in the form in which we now possess them. We can see how the use of Mähäräṣṭrī for the composition of songs and lyrics and writing long epics making use of Yamakas and other tours-de-force, is partly responsible for the form in which we find it. The use of Sauraseni and Magadhi with their sub-dialects and rarely Ardha-Magadhi and Paisaci (?) in the dramas side by side with Sanskrit has led to the effacement of finer dialectical differences and some overlappings between them. The inscriptional Prakrits are influenced to some extent by the form of writing in which the gemination of the consonants (length) remains unmarked and the order of the members of consonant-groups remains uncertain, Even the treatment of these Pra

Page #17

(*8)
krits by the Prakrit grammarians in conformity with a definite plan has left some traces on their present form, the most important of which is the tendency to form wide generalisations on the basis of a few examples. With due consideration of all such points, the man task of the student of the MIA. is to ascertain the local distribution of these Prakrit dialects and to arrange them in a chronological sequence so as to mark the various stages of their growth.
In spite of the meagreness of the evidence, its conflicting nature and the theoretical difficulty of distinguishing between regional and chronological features, it is possible to arrive at some broad conclusions. To the North-West can be assigned the Mansehra and Shabhazgarhi versions of Asokan inscriptions, the dialect of the Kharosthi Dhammapada and possibly Paisaci and its sub-dialects. To the East lie the Asokan inscriptions of Gangetic basin and the mouth of Mahanadi, the Ramgarh inscription and the Dramatic Magadhl with its sub dialects. To the West are found the Girnar version of Asoka, the Pali of the Buddhist canon, the inscriptions of the Satavahanas and Western Kṣatraps and the Mähäräṣtrī Prakrit. To the Midland belongs Sauraseni and to the east of it Ardha-Mag dhi, while a similar d'alect is seen in the inscriptions of Agoka in the Deccan. Of course, this distribution neglects some amount of conflicting facts and leaves some dialects out of consideration. Attempts have been made to reconstruct the features of the earlier stages of some of the Prakrit languages available to us in their present forms. Such has been the case with Pali as it is known to us at present, with Ardba-Magadhi as it is handed down by the tradition and for Mähäraṣṭri which is regarded as being closer to Sauraseni or even identical with it. But the results in this direction have been very meagre and pertain to a few phonetic features and grammatical forms. These remain mostly speculative in nature and do not justity rewriting the traditional texts.
The classification in time is based on a firmer foundation and is more comprehenaive. To the older stage belong the various inscriptions, Pali, ArdhaMagadbi and Paisaci. A later stage is formed by Sauraseni, Magadhi, Jain Mahārāsṭrī and on the threshold of the NIA. are found the Apabhramsa dalects and Avahaṭṭhā.
The NIA. languages cover the whole of the Northern India and parts of the North-Western region, Deccan and Shri Lanka Thev naturally admit of a ready geographical distribution. Their relation with the various MIA dialects. however, is not easy to settle; nor can we group them in cognate grouns with equal. Most of them date from a nearly identical period, ease. though the first avail ble documents in them belong to different centuries from the 10th to the 16th, while many have no written literature. Having continuous areas to cover. there are naturally many border dialects like Bhojapuri, Kachi. etc., the affinities of which are bound to remain doubtful. Some of the languages of NIA. form distinct groups either on account of isolation, Thus Simbaseparation or other historical incidents lese is separated from the main body of the IA. by the Dravidian tongues and follows its individual line of development. The Dard languages (including the Kafir dialects, the Khowar of Chitral, the Kohistanī dialects and the Shina group) are found to the extreme NorthWest and my owe their peculiarities either to an independent origin on par with Old Indian and Old Iranian or may be the result of a strong Iranian influence. Out of them only Kashmiri came under the influence of Indo-Aryan civilization On account of the nomadic life of the speakers, another of the Midland or a NorthWestern dialect assumed different forms in different countries. These are known as Gypsy dialects (Roman).
In contrast with the OIA, the MIA. group shows quite a different appearance on account of a drastic change in its phonetic structure. In grammar and syntax, the older synthetic mode of expression continues
nearly to the end of the period, although the richness of forms of the older stage is lost and now and then, especially in the Apabhramsa dialects, we see the rise of the analytical mode of expression. In their voca. bulary, the MIA. dialects are mostly dependent on the OIA. but with a few additions of the socalled Desi words of uncertain origin. The percentage of these depends both on the date and the nature of the work in which they are found.
The Indo Aryan languages proper are usually grouped into an inner and an outer band with a few intermediate languages, a classification which is much disputed but to which new support is sought in the treatment of the aspirates in the different NIA. languages. It is. however, more convenient and safer to follow a much more limited type of classification based on both geographical and historical considerations. To the North-West are found Lahnda and Sindhi, to the South we have Marathi, to the centre belong Panjabi, Rajasthānī, Gujarati and Western Hindi, to the East of it the Eastern Hindi dialects, to the North of the Midland the Pahari group and to the East belong the Bibarī dialects, Criya, Bengali and Assamese.

Page #18

(9)
from the south and the majority of Prakrit stanzas quoted in the works on rhetorics. But the problem Sanskrit dramas and the Sattakas and the use of Saurawhich needs a clarification pertains to the stanzas in occur in them. A brief history of this problem may help seni, Magadhi and various Ts and fans which may us to understand the situation, though the problem cannot be completely solved due to lack of necessary evidence in this regard.
3. Prakrit Languages
The dictionary quotes extensively from the seven main Prakrit dialects to illustrate the meanings of words included and also makes a systematic attempt to trace the origins of the words in the Indo-Aryan branch of the Indo-Europian family of languages. For this purpose a brief survey of these languages may prove useful. The question about the peculiar features of each dialect and the relations among them make it necessary to name the dialects specifically when quotations from them are given. This is done by naming the dialect at
(1) Ardha-Magadhi
the beginning and giving the name of the book at the writers have used two closely related languages, ArdhaFrom among the MIA. dialects the Svetambara
end.
The bulk of the citations naturally comes from the Prakrits known as Ardha-Magadhi (AMg.), Jain Mābārāsṭrī (JM). Jain Sauraseni (JS), Mahārāṣṭrī (M.), Sauraseni (S). Magadhi (Mg.) and Apabhramsa (Apa. ), because the literature in these dialects is found in large measure. The main problem which a lexicographer meets in this case pertains to demarcating clearly one dialect from another and to decide to what extent minor dialectal differences in a given Prakrit can be ascertained and indicated Obviously a given quotation from a given book must be assigned to the language in which it is written, at the same time taking note of the fact that many books use different dialects in different parts of the same work. Thus many books written in JM. include long passages and stories in Apa., and many quotations from the canon occur in JM. works. In fact it is often difficult to decide whether a given work is to be considered as being written in AMg. or JM. In the present case only such books as form the part of the Svetambara canon are cited under the siglum AMg. and others are considered to be in JM. This is obviously arbitrary and leads to such results as considering the Ogha and Pinda Niryuktis as being written in AMg. while the AvNi. and AyarNi. in JM. This problem is acute in the case of the Prakirņakas and again an arbitrary decision is taken by including all such works attributed to gaars in AMg. and those of definite authors in JM. In case of doubt, the reader should refer to the classification of books on the basis of their language, given separately. All Prakrit works written by the Digambara writers are given the designation JS. while under Apa. are included works which are written by both the Digambara and Svetambara writers, and a few verses found in the works of non-Jain writers,
In the case of other dialects, under Mahārāṣṭrī are included the well known older epics, and more recent ones P.D. II
Magadhi and Jain Mähäräṣṭri, to compose their canonical and post-canonical literature. The relation between AMg. and JM. can be understood better by considering the history of these languages. Slowly AMg. has come under the influence of Mahārāṣṭrī so as to develop into what is now called Jain Mähäräṣṭrī; and in the course of a further development, this language is modified by the influence of Sanskrit on the one hand and the Apabhra. méa dialect on the other.
The oldest form of AMg. can be seen in the first books of Acaranga and Sutrakṛtänga and the older parts of other works like Uttaradhyayana etc. It is characterised, in its phonology, by the change of -r- to -- to a greater extent (anelisa Ayar. 1. 9. 1. 16; Suy. 1. 15. 2); the loss of initial y-(ahāsuyam Ayar. 1.9. 1. 1; avakahae Ayar. 1.9.1.2; avanti Ayar. 1.4.1.2; ahattahiyam Suy. 1. 13.1) and the change of -kh- to -gh(aghai Ayar. 1. 4. 2. 1; Süy. 1. 11. 23; äghāyam Suy. 1. 1. 2. 1). In its morphology we have a number of old forms: the Nom. sg. in -e also in stanzas (cf. uvahanasuyam Ayar. 1.9); forms of the past tenses (atarimau Suy. 1. 11. 6; riittha Suy. 9. 1. 1; ahesi Ayär. 1.9.3.6); forms of the future (agamissa Suy. 1. 15.25); a present part. formed by -mina (abhivayamine Ayār. 1. 9. 1. 8); forms of Gerund with -nta (hanta Suy. 1.8.5) and iyāna (ārustyāņa Ayār. 1. 9. 1.3). Nouns often govern cases (kālamākankhi Suy. 1. 11. 38) and a few peculiar words are met with (anju straight. Sùy. 1. 9. 1; Āyār. 1. 9. 1. 7; ac a- ‘body* Ayār. 1. 9, 1. 11; Suy. 1. 13. 17; adu or Suy. 1. 2. 2. 2; phusa daughter-in-law Suy. 1. 9. 5).
6
The later and more usual form of AMg. is distinguished from JM. by the additional features like the lengthening of final -am before eva (evameva samaṇāuso Naya 1.9.53); i representing iti (Goyama i samane Uvās. 86); forms of prati without the final i (paḍuppanna Suy. 2. 1. 15); Nom. sg. e in prose (ceie Viva. 1); Inst. sg. in -sā (kayasa Dasave. 6. 27); Dat.

Page #19

(
10)
sg. in trâu (neraiyatlāe Niraya. 63); Loc. sg. in -msi shows the influence of the literary Apa. with which the
suyanijjan181 Kapp. 32); Nom. sg. of - stems in - writers were thoroughly acquainted. In its phonology, (bhagavam Kapp. 1; wannavam Utt. 3. 18); forms like we find the contusion between written -m- and -va kammunā (Uit. 1. 17), käladhammunā (Vivä 49 ); (samarā VajLag (2); simplification of the conjuncts verbs like äikkhai (Kapp. S. 64); kuvvanti (Süy. I. (hosai VajLag. 54); & shortening of the final vowels 4. 1. 16); duruhāmi (Uvās. 108); past tense forms in (ju Vaj Lag. 234; annaha VajLag. 129); the change -tthā ard -inau ( wippalaithā Nāya. 1. 1. 159; harinsu of -8. to -h- (dehi Vajlag. 296 ) and -y- in place of -rSuy. 1. 14. 3), and a number of peculiar forms of the (taheya VajLag. 383). In its morphology, we have the infinitive (parraittae Nāyā. 1.12 39 ) and Gerund (ciccă forms of the Nom. and Acc. falling together (dala Uct. 7. 28, vijahittu Utt. 8 2; laddhur Dasave. 8. 29). Acc. VajLag. I 4; avui Acc VajLag 273 ): pronominal In its syntax and vocabulary AMg. resembles Pāli and forms like pai ( Inst. VajLag. 190; Loc. Vaj Lag. 704) is nearer to it than the later Prakrits. The language of and geruods in -eri or ivi (langheri Erz. 78. v. 181 ). the canonical works like the Painnas, however, is hardly It shows a further contraction of syllables (anantassa different from the older stage of JM.
Erz. 82. v. 255; atthantassa Vaj Lag. 132 ) and all traces
of the Sk, -aya- formans of the verbs are lost (cintai (ii) Jain Mābārāstri
Erz. 81. v. 240; vāranti VajLag. 56). The various Nijjuttis and narrative works like
(iii) Jain Sauraseni Paumacariya, Vasudevahirdi and others may be taken
The name Jain Saurasenl is given to the Prakrit to represent the archaic form of JM, the language of
dialect which is seen in the works of the Digambara the non-canonical books of the Sverâmbara writers.
writers, most of whom come from the south. Here the Nom. sg. always ends in -o.
It is The Dat. sg.
modelled on the name Jain Maharastri which is used to has & -ya ending (vanāya VasuHi. 169. 19) and a
designate the Prakrit found in the non-canonical works of Inst. sg. is formed with - Ina (naravaiņa PaumCa.(V.)
the Svetambara writers. The Digambara view is that 5. 110). The Loc. sg. of Fem, words also ends in
the original canon, containing the teachings of the last dyan (disāyam VasuHi. 280 27 ); mayā is used along
prophet Mabăvira, was lost along with the language in with mae as Inst. sg. 1 Per. pron.; a form in un
which it was composed, when the community migrated (janam VasuHi. 174. 26 ) is found for 1 P. sg. present,
to the south, sometime before the beginning of the and there are future forms like bhunjihar (VasuHi.
Cbritstian era. Their religious needs were however met by 22. 28) and pavissehan (PaumCa (V) 8. 191). There
the writings of later scholars like Puspadapta, Bhutabali is a constant confusion between the Inf and Ger. This
and Gunadhara in the form of Sutras called Satkhaqform of the language also shows a large number of
dagama and Kasayapabuda. Later on these works syntactical peculiarities. A number of words and forms
were commented upon by scholars like VTrasepa and of AMg. are also utilized. In its classical form, as
Jinasena, in extensive works called Dhavala, Mabarepresented by Haribhadra's Samaradityakatbā, JM.
dhavalā and Jayadbavala, mostly written in Prakrit but comes Dearest to pure Mābārăstri and shows the influ
with passages in Sanskrit as well. In the meantime the ence of Sk. in the use of cui- forms, compounds ending
religious and the philosophical teachings were written in -bhūya (-bhūta ) and the literary words. The late
down in manuals in verse by scholars like Kunda kunda, form of this language is best seen in the stories of
Vattakera, Yativrsabha and otbers upto the 12th century. Devendra in his commentary on Uttaradhyayana and
All these writings are included in the scope of Jain the anthology called Vajjalagga. Here we see a
Sauraseni. strong influence of the Apabbramsa dialects making itself felt both in its phonology and grammar. This is The language found in all these books is fairly but inevitable when we find writers like Somaprabha uniform but differs considerably from the Jain Mābā. composing works in all the three languages, Sk. JM. rastri of the writers from the north. It changes the Apa. without any plan and mixing them in all possible Sapskrit sounds ta and tha into da and dha and preserves ways. In this context, it must be clearly under the original sounds da and uha. It changes the dental stood that this so called Apa, influence originates from Dasal into na and knows only one sibilant sa. Somethe spoken languages (in all probability the mother times jña is changed into nha. Peculiar grammatical torgues of the writers ) and traces of it can be detected forms are a Loc. sg. ending in -mht and the adverbial abeven in the AMg. canon (acchahin Utt. 22. 16 ) and lative ending -do. The verbal terminations like - and -te the older works in JM But this late form of JM. Are changed to vi and -de. Passive is formed with -iya

Page #20

(11)
and the gerund ends in -duna. The name given to this Kālidāsa, Harsa, Südraka, Visakhadatta, Bhavabhūti dialect is intended to suggest that it is a peculiar form and others upto the dramas of Rajasekhara and the of Sauraseni used by the Jain writers of the south. The dramatic theory that Saurasepl was the language of peculiarities of this Prakrit need further confirmation the prose spoken by ladies in general and Mahārāstri by the editions of these works in a more critical form. to be used in their stanzas, a view held by Pischol,
Konow and others. This position was, however, objected (iv-vi) Māhārāstri and the Dramatic Prakrits
to by some scholars and the use of Mahārāştri wag The nature of Mahārāstrī is described by the
denied for the dramas as was done by Hillebrandt and Prakrit grammarians like Vararuci, and others follow
others, or it was considered to be the same as Sauraseni ing bim, in detail because they considered it as repre
but in a more developed form as M. Gbosh and sentative of all the Prakrit dialects being the most
others did, thus casting some doubt on the validity of
of comprehensive. From the date of Dandin onwards it is
the views of the dramaturgists and the grammarlans. named Maharastri and is thougbt to be the best Prakrit In particular, two problems arose (1) whether the in which tamous epics were composed. But its relation
stanzas are to be in Maharastri or in Saurasens and to Dakşınätyå of Bharata, as used in the dramas, and (2) whether the generally accepted characteristic to Sauraseni in particular, which is the most extensive of Sauraseni, the voicing of the dental stops is valid ly used Prakrit in the dramas, remains doubtful and or not. This led to a further question, what language the problem needs a historical review.
is meant by Prakrit' when it is used by the gramma
riaps as a cover term for the whole group of Middle IndoDuring the beginning of the 20th century when Aryan languages with which they deal. Prakrit studies were in their intancy and were primarily related to the dramatic Prakrits, a controversy Alexicographer bas to decide how to designate arose about the distribution of dialects among the the Prakrit passages which are found in the Sanskrit dramatic personages and the distinction between the dramas. Hence he has to take some decision about various Prakrits as described by the Prakrit grammarians. the various Prakrits, dialects and subdialects called It was natural and inevitable to proceed with the Bhāsā and Vibhāṣā. A closer examination of the information supplied by the writers on dramaturgy and original data is essential to decide the issue. I have poetics as regards the use of the dialects by various a feeling that much of the controversy on this account characters in the drama and to rely on the Prakrit is based on some assumptions of a linguistic nature grammarians for the distinguishing characteristics of which are not correct and some interpretations of the dialects usually enumerated in this context The the passages on which they are based appear to be result was a kind of disagreement between the two erroneous. To the first group belongs the view that views leading to the problem of deciding the Main distinctions in the literary dialects is mostly based on Prakrit of the dramas. However, it must be noted phonological differences. This may be true whero wa that neither the Prakrit grammarians were of one can actually apalyse the spoken languages which are opinion about the features of a given dialect, nor did the fairly uniform in this respect. But while dealing with works on dramaturgy show complete unanimity in the ancient and medieval languages which are availablo use of a language by a particular type of character in the only in their written form, this may not do. They are dramas. The result was a kind of historical recons- not uniform and use material belonging to different truction of the growth in the dramatic practice, wbich stages of development and hence are misleading. Nor distinguished various stages: (i) a pre-classical Prakrit are the sounds uniformly used in all the words in which called old Saurastni, as the dominant language in the they are expected to occur. A striking example, is earliest stage of the Sanskrit drama, as seen in the supplied by the opinion of Lüders, who sets up & fragments of Buddhist dramas discovered in Central language called Ardba-Magadhi for the dramntic fragAsia, edited and analysed by Lüders (ii) a slightly ments found in central Asia on the evidence of a later stage as seen in the use of Saurasenl in the single form of future tense kähäme for this purposo, Dhruvās given by Bharata in the 32nd chapter of his His other assumption, that the three forms of Prakrit Natyasastra and the absence of Maharastrl in the list revealed in these fragments are representative of their of the dramatic Prakrits, this language being gramma- older stage on the ground that the intervocalic stops are tically analysed by Jacobi and supported to some extent preserved and are not lost, is also doubtful. Phonetic by the recently discovered dram 13 attributed to Bhāsa changes in the various languages and dialects do not (lii) a classical stage represented by the dramas of proceed with the same speed and older and younger

Page #21

(12)
phases can be found at any given stage of the language. available. There is, however, good internal evidence to That intervocalic stops in Latin are either completely show that this chapter forms an integral part of the lost or voiced or kept in tact in the different Romance original work. There is no doubt that the first 9 languages does not give us any right to say that one chapters deal with some Prakrit, which is not painod at is older and the other is younger in their written form the beginning. In fact the very first Sutra rung as and the same is true in case of the Prakrit languages. S ta: which means of the vowel which is initial' and Lüders himself has argued that the original language of constitutes an adhikāru for the following Sutras. This is the Pāli canon voiced the inter vocalic stops, where the followed by the next Sutra Tavafeg which shows later Pāli uses the unvoiced consonants. This has an that the initial vowel of words like aqfe and others is Important bearing on the nature of the language of the changed to a giving rise to the form a f in this canon of the Svetambara community, usually called language. But then what is the name of this language ? Ardha-Māgadhi but the older name of which was The author says nothing. It may look reasonable Addhamāgaba Bhāsā. The MS, material of the canonical to think that it was called Prakrit' because the work works, both older and younger, is such as to allow side bears the name Prakrtaprakāśa. But then all the by side the use of the intervocalic stops and their loss other languages dealt with in chapters 10, 11, and 12 oven in the same sentence or verse. This has led to a are also included in the scope of the title. We may regular duplication of all words containing such sounds further ask, does the author use the word Prakrit in two which cannot be true of any language whatsoever. For senses, Prakrit as a cover term for all the dialects dealt example the 3rd person singular active form of a verb, with and Prakrit as a specific dialect treated in the first which is very frequent cannot be having both ++i and 1 9 chapters? In this first alternative, what is given then as its ending throughout the language in all its occu- in these chapters is not the description of any one dialect, rrences. And to make the matter worse, textual evidence, but a common core of all the dialects taken together. But wbether the MS. is on paper or palm-leaves, whether then, following the usual practice only the deviations old or young, is equally uncertain. There appears to from this common core should have been given tor the be a feeling among the editors of the Agamic texts other dialects which follow. But this is not the case. that giving preference to the practice of retaining the There are two Sutras each, at the beginning of the last consonants would make the language look older and three chapters, the first giving the name of the lauguage Dearer Pāli which is cong dered as an older speech. and the second its basis. The Sutras run as tollows This does not look patural and hence cannot be accepted. Cat, fa: Theat, Art, anta: Teat, that To ascertain the relative ages of closely related languages, Tafa: . This means the procedure followed in the only valid criteria are of a grammatical nature. The describing these languages is first to describe Saura seni synchronic nature of the Asokan inscriptions and the and then mark the deviations from it in case of Paisāci phonological differences found in them are responsible and Magadbi. But the description is hardly sufficient for for extending their use to the literary languages as well. this purpose unless we include all the matter of the Besides morphological criteria one can also think of a first nine chapters in it. Thus the full description of semantic criterion as well for this purpose. For example, Sauraseni would consist of two conponents, one, the the meaning of the verb atipat- (causal ) and the noun special rules laid down in the 12th chapter and the atipāta shows the meaning to injure, to kill' only in other, all the rules of Prakrit as found in chapters 1-9. Päli and AMg. A reference to the article atipat- in the This part of its grammar is indicated by the last rule second volume of the Sanskrit Dictionary of the Deccan of the 12th chapter which runs staatgigta. This College will show that it is rarely used there in this sense means that the Prakrit language described in the first and the only examples for it are from the works of 9 chapters under the general name Prakrit is here Ayurveda, Susruta and Caraka, the language of which specified as having the name of Mahārāstri. Has not sbows a close affinity with Buddhist usage.
Dandin specifically said
that g iga
fag:? Thus the traditional explanation that the name Returning to the dramatic Prakrits, we should note of the language described in the first 9 chapters is Mähäthat a number of misinterpretations and conclusions rastri is correct. drawn from insufficient evidence have led to the present position, which, to say the least, is confusing. For The 3rd Sutra of the 12th chapter lays down the example it is often stated that the 12th chapter of rule that non-initial, intervocalic ta and tha are changed Vararuci's Prakrtaprakasa is an interpolation on the into da and dha. Here the basic sounds are to be taken ground that there is no commentary of Bhämaba now from Sanskrit and not from Prakrit because they do not

Page #22

(*13)
Survive there. Hence the earlier rule xfa: genta. the change of so to vot ( 1. 209 ) and before its change to y This implies that these two sounds did not exist in the is given (1. 210 ) Hemac indra naturally finds that a Prakrit of the first 9 chapters which thus differs from possible change of a to bas to be dealt with because Sauraseni in this diagnostic feature, which fact is true such a change has been admitted by someone as occurrof Māhārāstrī. Sutra 2. 7 states Frajfag ata as an ing in some sporadic words. Hence w raz does not exception to the general rule 2.2, by which both and mean in the topic of the Sutra 1, 209, but in the were dropped, but survived in a group of words as alphabetical order of the substitutes i. e. between a and 7, exceptions. For this gana a further change is indicated which is the place for en fact the sound which by 1. 29 7 *arlag by which ? is changed to u which is undergoes change is here contextually fixed as a (cf. found in the fipal form 3. Thus the voicing of dental 1. 204 a: = ET) apd the Sutra is shortened to the stops was a regular feature of Sauraseni while it occurred essentiel parts afg. If we add the word a: by in a few words in Mābārastrī as exceptions. This complex the process of fa, toe Sutra becomes #arfag at procedure is chosen because no single Prakrit dialect which is actually the Sūtra of Vararuci 2. 7 in his can be taken as a basis for others.
Prākta prakāśa. It is immaterial whether Hemacandra Once this position is realised the other problem
should have given the name of Vararucior refer to any about ibe statement of Hemacandra 1. 209 17 #faz
other grammarian which uses such a rule in the des
cription of the basic Prakrit or uses the word to refer to ऋत्वादिपु द इति आरब्धवानः स तु शोर सेनोमागधोविषय एवं a fa z a gets clar fied. This passage has
a whole school of Eastern grammarians. It only means troubled all those who have worked on it, begioning
that his view is different from them, and he does not with Th. Bloch, Pischel, Niti-Dolci, Alsdorf and others.
admit such a change in the principal Prakrit. It helps The question is raised, whom does Hemacandra refer to
bim then, to follow a uniform procedure of baging the by fun and why did be introduce this discussion in the
rules of change on each preceding dialect, which he does
teatras commentary of the Sutra which lays down the charge by changing the order of the dialects to of sfera to n. The scholars have blamed Hemacandra 1977). AT [T Te iraala s tertal. quite unnecessarily by saying that he has copied this feaseft naa). Tr i vaaraa l. passage from somewhere and without understanding it. He also takes note of the words and forms which More specifically it is argued that the words afat
Prakrits have taken from Sanskrit, mainly words, by are a wrong copying of some such expression as praias
his last Sutra 4. 446 Si s a faci instead of fra standing for a reduplicated substitute in the system
blaming him on the count of copying without underof grammar followed by Trivikrama and others.
standing, we must admire his skill is following a far
more systematic and rigorous procedure in this case. A little more attention to the plan of Hemacandra's Prakrit grammar can clear up this point. This passage With these interpretations and clarifications, we occurs in the section dealing with the Main Prakrit, should be able to state the exact relationship between which fact is of some importance. The systein followed the two Prakrit dialects Mābāråştri and Siuraseni. It by Hemacandra in stating the changes of noninitial inter is not a question of one language developing into vocalic consonants is as follows. After stating the general another, or that one is an earlier form of the other. rule of dropping such consonants 5--3-1-a-7-9-9 and They are two distinct dialects which were used for a (1. 177). Hemacandra notes the sporadic changes of literary purposes at different stages of their development. the Sanskrit conscnants in their traditional order beginning In case of the dentals, their voicing was a regular with onwards When these substitutes are more than feature of Saureseni, while such a change is confined to one for a given consonant the Sūtras are arranged in that a few words in Mahārāstri, which can be considered group according to the traditional order of the substitutes. as either archaisms or borrowings. There is however To take an example the consonant , its change to a is one more difficulty in accepting such a position, which given in 1. 181, to af in 182, 10 in 1. 183, to in 1.184, must be cleared up. The Prakstaprakāśa of Vararuci to in 1. 185 and to in 1. 185. Here the substitutes appears to show a change of this type even in a morphofollow the traditional order. When it comes to a, besides logical form which cannot be thus limited to a few words, its general loss the other changes are given as follows. or thought of as an isolated phenomenon. Vararuci It changes to and (1. 204), to z (1. 205 ), to 7 5.6 reads E, which Bhämaha explains as (1. 206-7) to op (1. 208-209). to (1.210), to stating that the Abl. sg. of a-ending nouns la thig Prakrit (1.221 ), to (1.213 ) and to (1.214). Here the is formed by adding the terminations
or ft. substitutos are also in the traditional order. After stating The Gading at is nothing but the bayo itself with the

Page #23

(14)
loss of the final consonant in the original Skt. form. But both the endings and with a voiced dental, which though regular in Šauraseni, are unusual in Mābārāṣṭrī Bhāmaha's examples are art, at but no such forms are recorded in this Prakrit. No other grammarian meations them. Nor can we regard them as archaisms. It appears that these forms are due to some misunderstanding of the wording of this Sutra, either on the part of the earliest editor Cowell or possibly on the part of Bhamaha himself. Though Vararuci does not specifically mention the mechanism of stating grammatical rules, he generally follows the method followed by the Sanskrit grammarians which was accepted as a regular technique of the science of grammar. Whenever a single vowel is to be stated a is added to it, to fix its quantity and to make the use of its cases easy. Thus a: stands for the gen, sg, of which is equal to its explanation तस्य. In a series of terminations which begin with vowels this become essential In the above Sutra the suffixes enumerated are r,, and f and to combine them, a is added to the first two to give मात्, ओत् and following the usual Sandhi rules, the सूत्र reads : in the plural. Failing to understand this, some one wrongly analysed it into : and to justify it gave the examples in conformity with it as वच्छादो, वच्छादु This can hardly be the mistake of the commentator, when we find that 5. 22 and many others are correctly analysed by him. Oace Cowell included this in his edition, most of the later scholars have continued to repeat it to the present day. Let me add here that this problem is simplified for the sake of clarity.
The idea that all the stanzas spoken by those characters in the Sanskrit drama who use Śauraseni in their speech, are to be taken as composed in Maharastrī, is another case of misunderstanding. Bharata's statement that seven dialects were used in the dramas and in addition seven more sub-dialects were also used is substancially correct. This list does not include Maharaṣṭri, but his treatment of Prakrit in general is nothing but a brief summary of what the later grammarians give. The 17th chapter of the Natyaśāstra is repeatedly edited by scholars like Dr. Ghosh and Dr. Vaidya. In this sketch there is nothing which is new and all that is found in it is also included in the first 9 chapters of Vararuci, and the first 3 Pädas of Hemacandra, and therefore they naturally deal with the same language Whether it should be called by the generic term Prakrit or by the specific designation Maharaṣṭrī is really of no importance, and in the editions of the Prakṛtaprakāśa, with the commentaries In South India, this situation persists. More particularly
Bharata's statement in V. 13 weg: would suggest that the sound occurring in the Main Prakrit was a slightly different sound than the same phoneme in Sauraseni and Sanskrit. Phonetically it may be slightly fricativised and thus would approach a sound like a stage which immediately preceeded its complete loss.
In this context it is necessary to refer to the traditional allotment of the various Prakrit dialects and sub-dialects to the different dramatic characters. Bharata
gives a detailed statement about it in his chapter 17, stanzas 32-40, and the Daśarup and the Natyadarpana merely summarise them, as does also Viśvanatha in his Sahityadarpana. He, however, makes a slight addition to it with the words आसामेव तु गाथासु महाराष्ट्र (sic.) to which nothing corresponds in the other works. Both Pischel and Konow have given more importance to
this statement by taking the word gāthāsu in a wider
sense so as to include all kinds of stanzas in Prakrit
and making a sharp division between the prose in Sauraseni and verses in Mähäräṣṭri. In case of all other dialects like Magadhi, Sakari, Chandali etc. no such distinction is found, and the language remains the same whether in prose or verse. The oldest commentary on the Sahityadarpana written by a, the son of Visvanatha, explains prg here to mean fag which meaning the word Gatha has in the early literature. It is only later that Gatha comes to mean a specific Prakrit metre. We can then understand Viśvanatha to mean that only the songs, which occur in the speech of the ladies who speak Sauraseni, should be composed in Mähäräṣṭri. The practice of early Sanskrit dramas shows that a song to be sung by a female character was used at the appropriate occasion and Mähäräṣṭri was the most suitable Prakrit for it, because it was used for this purpose and owes its extreme attenuation
to it.
The subordinate role which Mähäräṣṭrī plays in Sanskrit drama can also by seen by ascertaining the amount of Prakrit stanzas in them. A quick check reveals that the number of stanzas in Prakrit in the early dramas was small. The three dramas of Bhasa प्रतिज्ञायौगन्धरायण, चारुदत्त and बालचरित show a total of 12 Prakrit stanzas and not a single one out of them is put in the mouth of a woman. In the dramas of Kalidasa, has 8 stanzas out of which 7 are spoken by women but only one of them, put in the mouth of the aft in the prologue, can be called a fa. In afafafaa there is a single stanza uttered by the heroine herself and in farafta, out of a total of 31, only 3 are put in the mouth of the ladies. Of the thres dramas of Harsa, a has 8 out of which 4 are

Page #24

(15)
a
uttered by ladies and only the three fegetargi sung of r in clusters which is given as a feature of the 'racada by the st. can be called Giti. In a fara, 2 are dialect is actually found in the works like the Mabapurana uttered by 311707 41, the heroine in disguise, only one of Puspadanta written in the south, while this dialect is of which was sung by her. The dramas of Bhavabhuti assigned to the north. The only region where Apa, works show no Prakrit stanza and on the contrary figat sings were written without break is Gujarat and Rajasthan two stanzas in Sanskrit. Both the Prakrit stanzas in i. e. Western India. Here it is not possible to separate
t are uttered by the 71214 and 777. It will be the Apa. works from those written in early Gujarati and seen that we have to make a distinction between Prakrit Western kajastbani. For this purpose we will have to stanzas sung in the dramas and others used for other use a metrical and a structural criterion by wbich works purposes. The songs are very few and can be considered called Sanchis are assigned to A pa. while those wbich go As written in Māhi rastrī while all other stanzas will be by the name of Rāsu or Phāgu will belong to the earliest in the language used by the dramatic characters, viz. NIA, languages. A similar distinction is drawn between Sauraseni, Māgadhi, Sākärī etc.
Apabhrams and Avahattha works. As a practical device which will help to avoid the The Apa. grammar is a greatly simplified form of pitfalls in this regard, the quotations taken from the the Prakrit. The final vowels are all shortened except in dramas are always supplied with the name or status of monosyllabic words Both the declensions and conjugations the speaker. The literature available in other dialects are greatly reduced. The multiplicity of form in many like Paišācī and Culikā Paisací cr the numerous sub- grammatical categories is indicative of dialectal origing but dialects like Pracyā. Sabarī, Sakārī etc, is so scanty that they cannot be now sorted out on this basis The available no problem should arise. The available information in literature is of a purely literary nature and hence we have their case will be found under words peculiar to them treated all the Apa works as forming one language for according to the statement of the Prakrit Grammarians. the purpose of this dictionary, which will give only the
basic word-form. The language used by the Digambara (vii) Apabhramsa
writers appears to be fairly uniform and constitutes the
bulk of Apa, literature. The few works of the Svetāmbara From 1918 onwords a large pumber of works in Apabhramsa bave come to light due to the labours
poets, written in Western India, do show a few peculiar of many scholars and to-day we posses a sizable
features in grammar but on that account their language literature in it, mostly in the form of the lives of the Jain
need not be set up as a different dialect for the purpose of
the lexicon. The use of Desi words and roots shows & prophets or the Jain versions of the two epics, the
perceptible increase in this literature. the lives of the prophets Munisuvrata and Aristanemi. For this dictionary, two works Prakrtapaingala and Some books preach Jain religion and others are didactic in Sandesarāsaka, bave been included in the Apabhramsa nature. In comparison, the Apa. works written by group, though linguistically speaking they belong to the Don Jain writers are scanty. We possess the doubtful Avahattha stage. verses occurring in the fourth Act of Vikramorvasiya and a few stanzas in the works of Abhinavgupta dealing
IV. ORTHOGRAPHIC CONVENTIONS with Tantra philosophy. A few stanzas are also quoted
AND THE PHONETIC FORMS OF in the works op Alankarasāstra.
THE PRAKRIT WORDS The most striking feature of the Apa. literature is the fact that the whole of it is written in verse and there
The books in Prakrit wbich are used for this
dictionary show a number of writing conventions partly hardly exists any prose in it, except a passage in the book
based on the mapuscript tradition and partly on the called Kuvalayamālā, writien by Uddyotanasūri. But
views which the editors held about them. Others are the most valu: ble material of this language is found in a
based on the teaching of the Prakrit grammarians who large number of stanzas quoted by Hemacandra in the fourth Päda of his Prakrit grammar. They show not only
teach phonetic changes wbich a Sanskrit word undergoes
when it passes over to the Prakrits, which view the editors traces of their non-Jain origins but also contain purely
may or may not accept. These differences in the secular matter and show traces of different dialects.
sounds (or letters ) used, affect the alphabetical arrangeThe traditional distribution of the Apa. language ment of the words a good deal and hence the lexicogra. into the three dialects called Nāgara, Up Dagara and pher bas to look into the problems arising out of them, Vracada is of no great importance. The retention of and and take suitable decisions to be followed in the

Page #25

(16)
arrangement of the dictionary. Some of the more consists of two vowels coming together but without important ones are discussed here and the practico forming crasis, and forming two distinct syllables, followed in the dictionary is clearly indicated.
This will inevitably give rise to a glide sound between (1) The writing of g in the place of a vowel left
the two and yet will not have a full consonantal value.
The possible sequences of this nature will involve the over (udurita) with the loss of an intervocalic consonant
use of a front a back or a central vowel at both the is briefly called fa. The rules laid down by Hema
places. The i-like glide will thus assume three phonetic candra in this respect are neglected hy the writers of the MSS. and also hy modern scholars while editing
values, one which is the same as a clearly articulated the works in AMG JM JS
1- sound, the other between two front vowels becoming and Apa. It was only Pischel who tried to follow them in his edition of the
hardly audible and a third, a fleeting y like sound Desioamamālā, hy discarding the MSS. evidence on the
lightly pronounced. It is only when the preceding and ground that the explicit teaching of a grommariap must
the following vowels are central ones, do we get & y
glide to mark the syllabic boundary and Hemacandra's be given due weight against the chaotic writings of the scribes. Hem. (Gr.) 1. 180 lays down that whenever
rule correctly describes it as gofaatua:. The other
procedure to keep the syllabic boundary will be to use an intervocalic consonant is dropped, the remaining vowel will be pronounced as a form of a which is to be
a glottal stop which Sanskrit does not recognise as a
sound of the language that a similar situation does articulated very lightly, provided the surviving vowel is
not arise in case of 1- is due to the fact that its 8 or at and is preceded by or at and not otherwise. # nftar gra afasta wadi
pronunciation has already shifted to a fricative sound. ama wat aaT.
That the scribes did not take note of such a fine 4377fartafa By the general practice of the gram
distinction in case of the written records is quite undermariang # stands for both ep and si unless followed by an indicatory
standable and they used the same symbol for both. . Among the eastern grammarians, it is only Märkandeya who refers to this phenomenon (2.2).
Thus a form like afort or at as found in a work like
agafat should not be judged as an archaic form but This is regarded as a writing convention of the Jain scribes. In the purely non-Jain works like TEATAS.
merely as a writing convention for मइ or मए. रावणवह गउडवह. लीलावई and other later works like Another writing convention is found in the MSS. कंसवध, उपानिरुद्ध and some of the सड़कs. no यश्रति is used. of both the canonical works in Ardha-Māgadhi and the In the case of 13798 whep all the MSS come from post-canonical works in Jain Mähärastri. It consists in Jain Bhandaras and use throughout, the new edition writing the letter in place of many originally different of Prof. Suru drops this in all cases while others consonants, and is called afa on the analogy of ayfa like Prof. Patwardhan and Dr. Upadhye continue to and agfa, but does not belong to that category. Most use it even in non-Jain works when the MSS. show it. editors refer to it as a peculiarity of the MSS. they The same bolds good of a large number of Sanskrit use, and being convinced that it has no phonetic validramas written by Jain and non-Jain writers. This dity, they do not take the trouble of recording it fully. practice is thus taken to be a writing method and is Thls lack of evidence in the recorded readings makes it treated as such and no phonetic value is attached to it. difficult to judge it correctly. This writing of a is Hence also the complete neglect of the restrictions fairly well-represented in the edition of aggafest in imposed on its occurrence by Hemacandra..
both its Khandas and most Curnis on the caponical
works use it extensively. Schubring has very carefully The nature of this -y-like a similar use of -v-.
noted the writing of this a in his edition of the work is given by tradition as having a very light articulation,
fanfaati and allows us to judge its nature to somo as against the indistinct propunciation of referred to
extent. An analysis of its usage gives us the following by Bharata in 17. 13. Speaking phonetically we may
result. Compared to Sanskrit this written a corresponds describe the first as a glide and the second as a slightly
to different original consonants like # as in a fricativised voiced stop in the intervocalic position. This will help us in understanding Hemacandra's rule precisely
14. a 14. praa-*17*, #feuzefesa= and ascertain its validity. Here a glide of a palatal
f aiza, in place of 7 as in ita=971. in place colour is involved as occurring between two vowels
wale of as in faalfaat- fagfaa, alas-128 wafa= as in
nita=a which is due to the loss of single consonents in that sairaalaa
at nafa f a; in position. Hemacandra's condition is two-fold, reterence place of as in affiang a ja; ta 737. ITEIT being made to the immediately preceding vowel and the 177157; in place of as in araang, atract, vowel which follows it. The situation thus created afarafa. ga , a= fa, fan=

Page #26

(17)
*fact. #grato a retat. #facit= feat: in place The of admits both the rules and the exceptions as of य as in मायरित-आचाय, छाता-छाया; जिणाततण= legitimate, the अपरिणामक admits only the rules, but not जिनायतन, माति--मायिन तानी-नायिन etc. Such changes the exceptions, while the अतिपरिणामक admits only the are phonetically impossible and cannot be admitted in exceptions and not the rules. Obviously in the field of a any language. In most of these cases, a corresponding penal code the last two will draw wrong conclusions and form with a written y is also found, sometimes side by hence they should be excluded from their study, partside, which makes it obvious that the scribe wrote it icularly the atonements prescribed. No question of rapdomly and attached no importance to it. TAT secrecy is involved. चरए नवं is followed by अकामते चरते तवं, संसारकंतागओ
What then is the origin of this babit of writing arif af, oragar ofaat and many similar cases are found in the work fraag. This usage is so
a ? It is clearly based on some kind of misunderstanding
on the part of the scribes. The occasional lack of inconsistent and cccurs so unexpectedly that most of
attention on the part of the copyist explains their random them must be cases due to nerligence of the scribes.
Occurrence. The influence of the Sanskrit language at To judge this mode of writing one must ascertain
the basis of the Prakrit words may bave affected its source. No attempt is made so far in this direction
him to some extent, and is probably the main cause, except the one made by Dr. Upadhye. but in a halting
when the original Sanskrit contains a a. Its use for mapper. He suggests that this writing originated in the
other original sounds can only be explained on the basis copying of the Chedasūtras and it spread to other works
of a habit to transcribe a Prakrit word by the substitu
of a from it. It was done to keep these writ ogs concealed
tion of its Sanskrit counterpart, a kind of Sanskritisation
tion of its from the common reader or make them lesy accessible. of the language. Once he develops the habit of changing being meant for the initiated few. Such attempts are
a word like A9 to ha, it is but natural that now and not rare in Indian literature and one that is often met then a written , even if it comes from some other with in the Tantra works is based on rearranging the
Sanskrit sound, say in a word like a standing for air, letters in a complicated manner, so that one has to
will be written by him by using a, i.e. mat. Such a know this scheme before one is able to read them
process can only be unsystematic and sporadic and the correctly. But these considerations do not apply to the agyfa is exactly of this nature. Such writing based on a Ched sūtras of the Jain Canop The writing is not confin
misunderstanding is at work in all the classical language ed to any particular type of works but is found used in MSS, and some of them may find a place as the correct all types both old and new Nor is its usage confined to usage in the language as well. Whether this is A - words which need concealment, but is found in all kinds gaat or a regularly pronounced phoneme of Sanskrit is of words and these words are written both with and
Immaterial for such mistakes and both will be treated without and are not of the nature which are to be in the same manner. This position is confirmed by guarded from the common reader. Pt. Malvania's refer- the fact that in case of such sounds as are not normally ence to the custanza 6227 of the fasilygy and the dropped or written as 4, I. e. Z and 7 and q or, there commentary in the 3rd part of spagne do not prove will be no occasion for writing them aga, and this that they are to be excluded from the common man. The agrees with the known facts. The consonants which are चूणि on the निशीथभाष्य makes it clear that what is to written as त are क, ग, च, ज, त, द and य. From this be kept back are mainly the art and only incl. a very important and valid inference can be drawn. The dentally the Chedasūtra itself. Its wording is TOOOTEES MSS. which were copied by the scribes had in thom aaaring paar
The 26174154 confirms the a written -y- for all the above consonants which thus same view in the passage छेदसत्राणि प्रकल्पव्यवहारादीनि तानि indirectly proves the rule stated by Hemacandra in agat mgfagt afagfaat al dia, ay faylg213 1. 177 stating the loss of Intervocalic stops and also
arat marfu ATAT(?) farfar faciat yur . The proves its antiquity. same verse occurs in the 164 790. HETTATERT I n view of the above discussion, it appears quite is to be taught, taking into consideration, the place, reasonable to take the following decisions in setting up the time, and the person to whom it is to be taught. In the lemmata in the dictionary. The ya-sruti will be the last case three types of students are thought of. They allowed in the case of the Prakrit dialects AMg., JM., S. are called परिणामक, अपरिणामक and अतिपरिणामक. The and some of the Apa. works. but without violating the Second and the third type of students are to be excluded evidence of the MSS which use side by side the simple from the teacbing of the Chedasutra. The reason is the vowels as well. In the latter case a crossreference attitude they show towards the rules and their exceptions. to the form with the ya-sruti will be useful. If
P.D. 111

Page #27

(18)
the word is found in the Nom. sg. ending in -e or -0, the base in these dialects will be given with -ya and nota. The writing of syllables like far, यु. ये. यो etc. which sporadically occur will be given as g. 3, q, air etc. In case of the dialects Mähäräṣṭri and the dramatic Prakrits and some Apa. works, the ya-śruti will be avoided though the citations will show them with the ya gruti if the edition uses it, particularly in a work like Lila vaikaha, and stray verses cited in other works. The writing of the agfa will be avoided in setting up the lemmata but used where it occurs in the MSS. as an exclusive form. If both forms occur the form with -ta
will be avoided as far as possible. The reader will locate all such words in the place proper for it, as if the writing of the a is absent. No form with the afa will be given as lemmata unless no form without ta occurs. The agfa will be treated as occurring regularly and will be so noted both in the lemmata and
in the citations.
(2) Another writing convention, which has become very common in Prakrit, pertains to the writing of Anusvära for all kinds of nasal sounds. While Sanskrit uses It before such sounds as the semivowels, sibilants and the voiced aspirate, Prakrit writing convention is to extend it to all the places, before the stops, and before pause, for all nasalised vowels and all the nasal consonants except before n and m, where it is assimilated to the following nasal consonant. But in all such cases its original phonetic value remains intact. When the earlier Prakrit works used the nasal consonants following the Sanskrit mode of writing and made a distinction between an Anusvara and a nasalised vowel, no such distinction is made in Prakrit Devanagari orthography. Even at the end of a word or a metrical line, where Sanskrit insists upon the use of -m, the Prakrits will use an Anusvära. The writing of the Anusvara will be used in this dictionary whatever the mode of writing in various editions which are found to be inconsistent, and therefore call for some kind of normalisation.
(3) The distinction between an Anusvara and a nasalised vowel will be made only where the metrical rules do not help us to decide the length of the syllable as either short or long, which otherwise decides whether the sound is a full Anusvára making the syllable long or only a nasalization which keeps the value of the syllable unchanged. In practice nasalised vowels may be occasionally marked with the sign of nasalization (called Candrabindu ) at the end of words in Apabbramsa where the length of the syllable is not determinable.
(4) The use of a dental n and a retroflex ? in Prakrit has become a rallying point of different views and different practices. The Prakrit grammarians differ from each other and on some essential points the interpretations of the rules of grammarians have become a matter of doubt for some scholars. Different normalisations have been suggested and used by scholars and even the antiquity of a work is made to depend on it. Dialectal differences play a prominent part in it. Hence some amount of clarification must be attempted before a scheme is suggested and followed in this dictionary.
Some amount of basic clarification can be achieved
by trying to use the phonemic principle for this purpose. This will help to separate the writing conventions from the phonetic values of the sounds involved. The generally accepted writing mode for a given Prakrit dialect may also be used for this purpose. Pali, and Paisaci with its subvariety Culika Paiśacī use only a to represent this sound
and it will be retained here as it is. Like the absence of ya-śruti in non-Jaina works and MSS, is mostly absent and only or and or are found. The Jaina works except those in the dialect called JS. mostly give both
and or as optional sounds and are so written in the initial position. In the intervocalic position is preferred, and in case of the clusters resulting in a geminated nasal, both and or are used like other consonants. No final nasal sound occurs and the final -n in the original Sanskrit words is represented by an
. Thus there remain two positions in the phonology of Prakrit words where both the sounds are used in writing. These are the initial and intervocalic positions where both n and n and nn and np are used with no discernible principles.
In the initial position both n and are used at random or one or the other is used exclusively in a given Prakrit dialect and hence there results no contrast between the two. In the medial position an ungeminated sound is mostly used as of and not a, giving rise to no contrast as such. But in the intervocalic position the geminated sounds and our are found, but their distribution in a given dialect does not coincide with the distribution of an initial or 1. In this position both and or contrast with. Hence one may regard the relation between initial n/n as in complementation with nn and nn in the medial position and consider a medial single or as a different phoneme. This view is in agreement with the development of these sounds in the New Indc-Aryan languages. Hence the writing of the initial n and may be based on the writing conventions of a given dialect, and setting aside the writing of both and (or voT) as two distinct

Page #28

(19)
phones in some dialects like Magadhi, the use of and what is written as an 17 ETT is treated as a separate vor may be taken as a matter of free variation in the phoneme before the semi-vowels, fricatives and the aspirate other Prakrit dialects as is reflected in the MSS. b, as a para-8qvarna before the stops, and as a Ę in the tradition, which ruas parallel to the use of m at final position. The distinction between short and long a and the corresponding puro vowel. The etymologically and it and the mark of nasalisation of vowels will be valid distinction between the presence or absence of a n treated as mere diacritical marks and will not affect the sound in the corresponding Sanskrit words may not be alphabetical order allowed to decide the writing system of MIA., when they
VI. ABBREVIATIONS have completely merged together. Of course if the dialect shows a phonemic difference between the geminated wa
Various types of abbreviations bave to be used in a
comprehensive dictionary in order to make the work as and geminated una or nne, it will have to be kept intact.
compact as possible. These abbreviations fall into a num(5) The remaining writing conventions may be ber of groups : (i) abbreviations of grammatical terms merely stated. The writing for a which is found in and terms of general nature used in textual and literary the southern MSS. and editions is uniformly followed. criticism. These have been mostly standardised and they The representation of a double aspirated consonant by will be easily koown. (ii) There are symbols wbich will using two aspirates together, which is found in some of be used to make clear some aspects of linguistics which, the earlier editions of Prakrit works will be represented otherwise, will take a lot of space if explained in so many by the more phonetically accurate method of using the words. (iii) Then the names of various languages and unaspirated consonant as the first member of the cluster. dialects will have to be indicated by abbreviations and The zga ty or a will not be distinguished from the also the names of ancient writers and modern scholars normala or , as was done by Pischel in his Prakrit will be abbreviated when reference is made to them. grammar because it is not found necessary. The diffe- There will be abbreviations of the names of the series of rence between the short and long T and sounds can be publications and otber bibliographical information to be ascertained from their environment and hence not always given. Above all, a dictionary which is giving quotations necessary to be indicated. This may be necessary only in from various books on an extensive scale must make the case of the final syllable in Apab'ıramsa, where the use of abbreviations of the names of books which form principle of anceps is not valid. The MS. tradition of the corpus of the dictionary. As these dames of books writing and 3 in place of short and is often are expected to occur thousands of times, it is essential to retained without normalisation, because it cannot be make the abbreviations selt-explanatory or at least easily precisely decided to what extent it is phonetically different recallable, even at the cost of making them a little in view of the tradition current in lodo-Aryan languages longer, when once they have been noted. to consider and as shortened forms of T and sat. Abbreviations which occur in books which are to be Thus in the environment of a cluster wbich follows, no read continuously and which deal with a specific subject distinction of a phonemic nature is found batween i) [
ween L or topic will not be found suitable in a dictionary which or (e :), and the sounds may be really different in each
is to be constantly referred to and in which the context case. The citations will follow the writing found in the
extends over one small entry and gives no help in guessing editions used.
the source. The practice followed in the lexicons of
the classical languages of Europe viz. to use the namo of V. TRANSLITERATION
the author first and then indicate his work, will have to be The transliteration used is the usual one for Indo- reversed in the case of the classical languages of India. Aryan languages. Particularly to be noted are T TT The primary reference will be to the book and only in as †, st as $, as $ and fast as h, the nasalisation of case of homophonous titles of books will tho Outhor's vowels shown as on Devanagari letters as ~. Accents name will be given to distinguish between them. In the are not marked. Taking into consideration all the Prakrit Indian literature as a whole, the names of books aro dialects together, the alphabetical order will be as follows: found to be longer than those of the authors and homoBT, 6, 1, 3, 5, #, ., , 11, ait, -, (:), . , phony is prevalent in both the types of namos. The 1, ( ),%, , ( ), 2, 3, 2, 2, 01, , , , , , method used is to combine the abbreviated name of the 9, 4, 4, 7, 8, 4, 7, , 2, 1, 4, 8, . In following this book, followed by the abbreviated name of the author in alphabetical order, an attempt is made to keep it as close brackets. As the number of books to be roforrod to goes to Sanskrit as possible, because nearly all words will be on increasing, the abbreviations also become longer to followed by their Sanskrit equivalents. For this purpose avoid overlap.

Page #29

(20)
. The self-explanatory nature of the abbreviations of metres are given in Sanskrit as they also deal with books will depend upon the system used in forming them. Sapskrit metres. With a complete listing of the names of The syllabic writing used in Indian literature makes it the books with their aobreviations supplied no difficulty necessary to abbreviate the names to the first syllable by should be met with in this regard. using the principle of acronomy. It may also require us to split the same into its constituent elements and
VII. THE PLAN OF THE DICTIONARY use this principle for each one of its parts and indicate This dictionary includes in its scope a group of the division by using the capital letter for the first syllable languages and makes use of a literature of varying types. of each such part. Most of the names will consist of It has perforce to use a large number of works which are two or three such units and very rarely four or more will not critically edited, and those which can be called carebe required. Further abbreviations may be used in the fully edited are based on d fferent principles for different case of words which designate the nature of the book editors. The books themselves often show a shorter and or its category. Such words are usually found at the a longer version, particularly in the case of the Ardhaond, and sometimes at the beginning of the name.
Magadhi canon. The divisions of a given text are dono Names of books in Prakrit involve a problem which
differently by each editor which makes it well-nigh must be taken note of. It is but natural to expect that
impossible by the given reference to use the commentary the names of Prakrit works should be in Prakrit. But in
on a given text, when the editors of the two are different. course of time, with the increased importance of Sanskrit,
Indices are prepared by the editors in such a way that the
original divisions of the book are neglected and references Rided by the tendency to write the commentaries in Sanskrit, the Sanskrit versions of the Prakrit titles come
cannot be easily traced. All these considerations have into constant use. The later writers usually used them
made it necessary to adopt a complex system for the in preterence to the Prakrit Dames. Hence by the mere
dictionary which needs some detailed explanation to facinamo of a work it is not always clear whether it is
litate its use. in Prakrit or in Sanskrit. A number of Prakrit works A typical entry in the dictionary is made up of the are known only by their Sanskrit names and these following elements, in a definite order: cannot be replaced by newly coined Prakrit names. The
| ]. The lemma (in Devanāgari ). name used by a long-standing tradition must be given duo importance in this regard.
2. Transliteration of the Prakrit word, and its
derivation or etymology given in the form of transliterated This dictionary uses Prakrit names of Prakrit
words and enclosed in parenthesis. works as far as possible. As a rule the pames of the
3. Alternative forms of the given word in Devabooks of the Ardba-Magadhi canon are given in their
năgarī in square brackets. The quotation from the Kosas Prakrit form being well-attested in the canon itself. In
and grammatical works dealing with the word are included the case of later works the Prakrit lite is given and if
here. It cannot be easily traced or is not found in the work Itself, the Sanskrit name is given with an indication
4. The Parts of Speech in Italics. that it is in Prakrit by adding into parenthesis (Pkt.).
5. The Meanings in English. If the work is in mixed Sanskrit and Prakrit, as in case 6. After each meaning there follow the quotations of the dramas or the proto-canonical works of the from Prakrit works, arranged in a specific order. Digambara sect, the Sanskrit name is preferred. In 7. Cross references where necessary. the case of the 19 and of the Prakrit name is tollowed by tbo Prakrit forms 9 and foot and in case of a
1. Lemma Sanskrit name ty and Tfór for the sake of consistency. Besides the regular phonetic changes which the Considerations like being better known decide the choice Prakrit grammarians describe as being applicable to the of सेतुबंध for रावणवह, कुमारपालपडिबाह for जिणधम्मपडिबोह, Sanskrit words, they also prescribe some changes as "and देशीनाममाला for रयणावली. The names of सहकs are being peculiar and applicable to the Sanskrit base of the given in Prakrit. The pames of Prakrit Grammars are words (Hem. (Gr.) 1. 15-22). Thus the consonantal replaced by the names of their authors with the addition endings of the basic words are either dropped or themaof Gr. added in parenthesis. From among the alter- tised by adding the vowel a to them and in the case of native names of a book, as far as possible, the older feminine nouns the suffix is naturally -ä or -1. In the case Dame is selected as in the case of Viyahapannatti for of Sanskrit pouds ending in vowels like , some changes Bhagavatīsūtra. The names of works dealing with Prakrit occur before the case-ondinge (Hom. (Gr.) 3. 44 foll. ).

Page #30

(21)
as given by the Prakrit grammarians. Secondary bases of the verbs will be treated in the same way.
All such changes are due to the attempt to get the word to conform to the phonological structure of the Prakrit languages. Hence the problem of setting up the lemmata of words in a Prakrit dictionary The practice of modern scholars as seen in the glossaries prepared by them for the books which they have edited differs from scholar to scholar. Various methods have been used by them, keeping the Sanskrit ending as it is, to produce new bases with no observable general principle. It seems best to set up the lemma in the Pratipadika form when it conforms to the rules of word-endings current in Prakrit. In case this is not possible, we set the lemma in the form in which it occurs before the inflectional terminations. More specifically, if a noun ends in the suffix -in (both kṛt and taddhita) it will be given without the final consonant. If the word ends in -an, the final consonant will be dropped, or a vowel like a or a will be added according to the gender of the word. For words originally ending in the base will end in -u or -ara~ ara as the case may be. The present active participle will be given as ending in -anta. The distinction between words ending in short vowels like i and -u and long vowels like -i and - will be preserved even in the case of teminine words. Words ending in -vas will be given as u-ending and those in -tr will be either shown as ending in -u or in-ta (>ya) and the ending -1 will be shown as -nnu or -nnu.
The adjectives will be given in their mas. or neu. forms and their feminine form will be shown as [f. -a] or [f. I as the case may be. It only the feminine form is available then atter the designation of the part of speech as adj. the symbol (f.) will be added.
Pronouns will be given as they actually occur in their Ncm. (?) Sg. form, and pronominal adjectives will be treated as ordinary nouns, so also the numerals.
The adverbs will be given in their actually occurring forms and in the case of adverbial use of the cases of some nouns and adjectives, they will be included under the corresponding nouns and adjectives.
In case of the verbs, the practice of the Prakrit scholars so far has been indecisive and varying. Some use the Sanskrit root itself, while others give the Prakrit form of the Sanskrit root, either using thematization or some other changes. Some give the 3. p. sg. Present form of the root, even when that form may not occur. Following a suggestion of H. Jacobi and confirmed by Edgerton, the verbs will be given here as ending either in -a or -e or -a, thus forming three types of conjugation. The base will be decided by cutting off the inflections
will be given in Devanagari throughout, an Anusvāra As regards the orthography of the lemma which will be used for all nasal consonants which do not occur
in the Prakrit phonology. Earlier scholars have used both the para-savarna and anusvāra indiscriminately.
Verbs will be distinguished from the other words by adding a hyphen at the end, even in the Devanagarī form.
2. Transliteration, Derivation and Etymology
Transliteration into Roman is given after the Devanagari word into brackets so that those who are unacquainted with the Devanagari script can also make use of the dictionary. But in the same brackets are included some other words given only in transliteration. These are intended to explain the derivation and to some extent the etymology of the lemma. In the majority of the cases the etymology of the Prakrit word is to be found in a Sanskrit word. Only in rare. cases we will have to search for origins in the pre-classical stages of language or even in the indo European stage. A brief indication of this will be given wherever necessary by quoting the relevant cognates. The derivation of the Prakrit words is a task beset with great difficulties. No attempt is made by the Prakrit grammarians to explain the derivation of the nouns, derivative verbs, adjectives, adverbs etc. as they occur in Prakrit, because they have laid down the rules of phonetic changes which relate a Sanskrit word with the word in Prakrit, sound for sound. A large number of words which in Sanskrit consist of two or more morphemes, which are based on the derivative history of the word, are all taken up as one unit and are used in Prakrit with the necessary phonetic changes. The Prakrit grammarians confine themselves only to such
suffixes which are not found in Sanskrit. Hence the derivation of a Prakrit word can only be understood by look ng into the corresponding Sanskrit word which is amenable to morphemic analysis, and this analysis is taken as the basis of the Prakrit word. To make such an attempt requires a good knowledge of the derivation of the Sanskrit word itself. Hence to make the process of derivation clear the transliteration of the Prakrit word and the transliterated form of the Sanskrit word which immediately follows are divided into their morphemic elements which are indicated by hyphens. This procedure works fairly well when the structure of the two words is nearly the same. But in many cases this is not so, because the way in which Prakrit uses its grammatical elements is not the same as is done by Sanskrit. In

Page #31

(22)
such cases two methods are used. One is to reconstruct the Sanskrit shape of the Prakrit morphemes sound by sound, and indicate their differences by using italics for the different elements. This often gives rise to a form which looks like Sanskrit only in its phonology, but not in its morphemic make up The two languages may use different morphemes, or even if they use the same morphemes, their allomorphs will be differently distributed, and this must be made clear by using italics for either the Sanskrit or Prakrit allomorphs. As this procedure gives rise to Sanskrit-looking words which are not correct in Sanskrit, they are also given in their correct form in transliteration. Hence immediately following the Prakrit used in Devanagari, there will be at the most three transliterated words in the brackets. In case the Sanskrit and the Prakrit word is the same in all respects, a single transliteration is given for both the Prakrit and the Sanskrit word. If there are phonetic and morphological differences, there will occur two transliterated words, the second being the Sanskrit form, provided it has the same grammatical and morphological structure. If it differs from the first, a third transliterated word will be added which will be a correct Sanskrit form of the Prakrit word as far as the meaning is concerned. This will also be the case if the meaning of the Prakrit word differs from that of Sanskrit, which will also indicate the traditional rendering of the Prakrit word into Sanskrit by the commentators. This arrangement will correspond to the classification of Prakrit words into tatsama and tadbhava types. The third type called Desi or Deśya will have a different treatment as far as its etymology is concerned and, if known, it will be stated clearly in so many words. 3. Sound Variations
The close relationship between the various Prakrit languages was well established from the very beginning of the tradition of the Prakrit grammarians. This is reflected in the fact that they take Sanskrit as the basis for their description of the Prakrits. In addition they take one Prakrit as a basis for another Prakrit as well. By common consent Mähäräṣṭrī is taken as the basis for a detailed description and this is taken as a new basis for the description of the other Prakrits like Sauraseni, Magadhi, Paisacī etc. In addition, Magadbī is described with reference to Sauraseni by noting the differing features of that language. This procedure is quite sufficient to conclude that it is a mere procedural relationship and is in no way connected with the independent nature of the Prakrit languages. That is why Rajasekhara uses the word adbhāṣākavi to describe himself and Lakṣmidhara gives the name sadbhdaa
candrika to his Prakrit grammar. Earlier, Rudrata enumerates the six languages as Prakrit, Sanskrit, Magadhi, Paiśācī, Šauraseni and Apabhramśa (2. 12). Later writers dropped Sanskrit and added Culika-Paiśācī as an additional Prakrit. Still later the number of Prakrit languages or dialects went on increasing with the result that the features by which one Prakrit was differentiated from the other became fewer and fewer and of less significance.
Even with the major Prakrit languages, in which a fair amount of literature is available, the form of a word shows a varying phonetic shape, which will make it necessary for the dictionary to give each form a separate place in the alphabetical arrangement. These differences, being phonetic in nature, affect a large number of words. In all cases of this type the meaning and the usage remain the same. To give recognition to all such variants as independent entries will lead to endless repetition without any advantage. To add to this undesirable situation, we find that a word assumes different shapes in the same language and thus increases the number of entries. Most of such changes are optional and both alternatives occur in literature. The failure on the part of the modern editors to distinguish between real phonological difference and orthographical variation has led to a situation which is intolerable and the lexicographer has to make a determined effort to reduce the number of entries so produced. This situation is similar to one, caused by the spelling variations, found in Old and Middle English. The treatment which is given to these spelling variations in the lexicons of these languages is adopted for the Prakrit words as well. In this dictionary, all such variations which occur in the same language or even a number of languages are given as variant forms at one place under the word chosen as the lemma. Thus writing of vowels like a and a as ya and ya, writing a ta in place of the consonants which are lost, writing i and u for the short values of e and o, and many others will be treated as spelling variants of a given vocable. This will help reduce the entries to a considerable extent and help the lexicographer to quote passages at one place even when they contain the given word in different phonetic shapes.
4. Parts of Speech
The grammatical status of the words in the dictionary will be indicated by using the theory of the parts of speech. The system of Sanskrit which classifies all the words (Padas) into two classes, nouns (called subantu) and verbs (called tinanta) and includes the other words among nouns by the device of adding terminations and

Page #32

(23)
then dropping them, is not much useful and cannot be or active meanings. A comprebensive statement of the followed for the Prakrit larguages. Nor is it economical formation of the verbal bases in the Prakrits can only because the classification of the subantas will have to be made when a detailed grammar of these languages be divided further into many subdivisions to explain their is made available, meaning and use in the language. The European 7-8. Two adverbial derivatives from the verbal grammatical tradition began with Aristotle by setting bases are given an independent status bere, the gerund up tbree classes called nouns. verbs, and a third heteroge- (Ger.) and the infinitive (Inf.). nous group called syrdesmol ( connectors) which included the article, pronoups. conjunctions and possibly
9. Under the designations Adnominal (adn.) prepositions as well. Thrax codified for Greek the eight (coined after adverbial ) are included particles like a parts of speech as noups. verbs, participles, article. pro
ples, article pro at , ag. . Daft etc.. postpositions governing nouds, prepositions, adverbs and conjunctions. As Latin
various cases of nouns, and adverbs of time, place lacked an article, Priscian dropped it in his classification
otion cause etc.. if they do not come under the scope of and added interjections in its place. These eight parts of
No. 3. The criterion used for this purpose is the speech thus became current upto the modern times and
primary relationship of these with another poups and not
Pr were used for all types of languages in spite of the
with the verb When these words are used in groups or fact that this theory is based on both formal and semantic
in correlative pairs they function as the traditlonal class criteria, its usefulness capcot be denied and it can be
of conjunction. This term conjunction is avoided because used for the Prakrits with some modifications.
disjunctive relations between sentences and words are not
covered by it. For this dictionary the followirg parts of speech will
10. Interjections (intj.) which semantically are be used :
expressive of emotions and feelings and syntactically 1. Noups along with the indication of their gender form independent sentences like the Vocative Case. as m. f. n.
2. Adjectives (adj.) also includipg all types of 5. Meaning analysis, Homophony and Polysemy participles which will be indicated by using their abbre- Meaning analysis is the very core of a dictionary. viations in parenthesis : adj. (ppp.) etc. When the But no general principles can be laid down for it, adjective is available only in its feminine form, it will be because it differs from language to language, and even indicated by writing (f.) after it. If all forms are ia the same language from word to word. Both historical found, the feminine form will be shown as ending in and logical considerations play an important role in the [f. a, ori).
relations which subsist between different meanings of a 3. Adverbs (adv.). This category will include word. Similarly no hard and fast line can be drawn Acc. Sg. of adjectives used as adverbs and Inst., Abl. between what may be called the overall meaning and a and Loc. cases of nouns similarly used. In addition it specific meaning. In the field of semantics, each word will include words used as adverbs like ajja, ahună, has its own bistory and it must be explained on the basis divi etc. and nouns with the adverbial suffix Skt. -as of its use in a given language. Semantic universals are (Prakrit -0).
hard to find and hence can be of limited uso. 4. Pronoups (pro.) including personal, demon- The apparent multiplicity of homonyms in Prakrit strative, reflexive ar.d other pronominal derivatives. need not be indicated by the use of index numbers because
5. Numerals ( nu.) include words used in the in the majority of cases its source in Sanskrit, which is sense of a number (saikhyā) or numeral qualifying given throughout, makes it obvious. Only in rare cases other objects ( samkhyeya ).
where the Sanskrit equivalent itself is homophonous, can
we use index numbers for this purpose. 6. Verbs (v). Here all stems which are conju. gated in Prakrit will be included even when they are The inherent ability of a language to make distinchaving different conjugational signs (vikaranas) or use tions in meaning to any degree of nicely makes it necederivative suffixes for passive and causative and even ssary to analyse it on the evidence of the actual use of the noun-bases (denominatives). These will be classified word in literature. This is true especially in the case of into three categcries, those ending in a, those wbich use e classical languages where an appeal to the intuitive judge(from Skt. Qya ) and those ending in a long vowel. ment of the speaker cannot bmade to decide its precise Passive bases except those formed with the regular passive meaning. In this connection, two things must be consuffix -ujja or ia will be given as bases with either passive stantly and clearly kept in mind. The semantic spectrum

Page #33

(24)
of the target language and that of the language of explanation may not be the same, and in fact is usually different. Secondly. only such distinctions in the meaning can be made which are caused by the influence of the linguistic environment only.
In this dictionary the different meanings of a word are indicated by the use of numbers in serial order and no complicated system is used to show close and distant relationships of the meanings. When one meaning directly leads to another, this is indicated by the use of the word hence. In the case of technical terms of different branches of knowledge, great care is taken to explain them fully. but no attempt is made to coin new words for this purpose.
In this part of the entry syntactic usage is given full
representation and the linguistic environment is stated in the form of classifications based on common sense, with no pretence of making them scient fically or philosophically very accurate. The lebelling of meanings as literal, metonymical or figurative, which is generally followed in the dictionaries of the classical languages of Europe, is not followed here. But all the necessary evidence in the form of quotations is given in ample measure, and the reader is free to draw his own conclusions based on them. So also the classification of meanings as expressive, indicative and suggestive which is done by the writers of rhetorics in Sanskrit is not explicitly stated Stylistic differences and usage labels are mostly confined to the passages taken from the dramatic works. whether in Sanskrit and Prakrit or wholly in Prakrit (the Saṭṭakas). Here the name of the speaker or an indication of his status s always given at the beginning of each quotation from the dramas.
6. Arrangen.ent of Quotations and Mode of Reference
The justification of the meanings assigned to a word lies in the quotations from the Prakrit literature supplied in the entry after each meaning. To keep the bulk of the work as small as possible, only selected quotations are given, which are necessary to determine the meanings. When the word occurs in a long passage as can be seen from the varnakas of the Avg. canon, only such portion of it is quoted as is essential to understand it. The portion which is dropped is indicated by using three dots (...) in its place. As the dictionary is using all the Prakrit languages, it is necessary to represent all of them, at least with one quotation from each Prakrit if the word occurs in it This will mean that if a Prakrit language is not represented by any quotation, ope can conclude that the word does not occur in that
language, and if no passage is quoted under a particular meaning it means that, that meaning is not found in it. Very often a given word with a given sense may occur in different phonetic shapes in different languages In such a case it will occupy different places in the Dictionary. In view of these and similar considerations a purely chronological arrangement for quotations from all the languages taken together is not possible.
It is found convenient to put the seven Prakrits which have sizable literature into three groups based on their linguistic and semantic affinities A word having a religious. a philosophical or a technical meaning is likely to occur in AMg. JM and JS. but may not occur in M., S. Mg. and vice versa. Moreover a word may be found in any two languages within a group. There are a large number of words which are peculiar to Apa. having formal and semantic features not found in other Prakrits Hence for the arrangement of the quotations these languages are divided into three groups: (1) AMg. JM JS (2) M., S.. Mg. (3) Apa. The above sequence of languages within a group will be strictly followed, so that quotations from them will occur in that order. For example, if a word does not occur in AMg. then quotations from JM. and JS. will follow. The same arrangement will be valid for the second group, first M. and then S. and/or Mg. The Apa. quotations will come last, which is as it should be in view of the place of that language in the Middle Indo-Aryan group.
The sequence between the first two groups cannot be pre-decided. According to the evidence found, either of them may get precedence over the other Considerations like the phonetic shape of the word, grammatical peculiarities and meaning will be taken into account in this regard. The chronology of all the books used for this dictionary cannot be definitely settled vis-à vis all the other books. Therefore a convenient sequence which will be followed in giving quotations is given in the list called ⚫ Languageand subject-wise classification with approximate chronology of the Frakrit works'. In the case of AMg. the traditional divisions of the canon are followed, though no pretence is made of a strict chronological sequence. In the canon there are sufficient indications to believe that its parts do not belong to the same period and are often separated from each other by a long period of time. But for the convenience of reference, a book will be treated as one unit and all quotations from any of its part will come together. It should be particularly noted that even the demarcation of languages like AMg., JM. or JS is not always clear and often remains doubtful. Traditions are divided as regards the number of the Prakiraak works and many of them are attributed to writers who lived long

Page #34

(25)
after the finalisation of the canon. For the dictionary of the present type such inaccuracies are inevitable. All that we can do in this regard is to label a word as older or younger.
For giving reference it may be noted that more than one edition of a book is required to be used for citations. This is because they differ in readings, orthography and divisions of the text. In a few cases a book has two versions, a shorter one and a longer one. In such a case a word may occur in one but not in the other. To meet this difficulty, references to more than one edition are given after the quotation, the second reference being in parenthesis. When we quote from a Curni or a Tika we give reference to the folio, side (a or b) and line because without this help the explanation of a word in a given text cannot be easily. traced in the commentaries. The system of numbering various parts of the text, except for the largest divisions, is, to say the least, chaotic and there is no agreement between different editions of the same text. The original divisions into Śrutaskandha, Adhyaya, Uddeśaka and Sutra is completely neglected while preparing indices for such works, making it impossible to use them. The number of verses in a text is not the same in different editions. This is also true of Sutra numbers, because the Sutras are differently divided by the different editors. All these facts make it well-nigh impossible to trace passages from one edition to the other. This explains to some extent the length of the references, and the reader is requested to try all of them if he wants to verify the quotations.
7. Cross-reference
The last element of an entry in the dictionary is a cross-reference to auother entry which is related to it in different ways. It may be a mere variant reading of the same lemma or an earlier or a later form of the same word occurring at a given place of the text. The way in which the work of the dictionary is planned and carried out, it is inevitable to have more frequent references to the words which come later than those which have already been given. To remedy this situation, recourse is taken to give the reference in both ways. However, great care is taken to choose the lemma which must be based on its usefulness for a detailed treatment. Another way adopted to help the reader is to put together all minor variants of a word in one place. Citations are also kept at the minimum by avoiding repetition at different places unless absolutely necessary.
8. Material from Other Sources
In order to achieve maximum comprehensiveness, words which are found in the earlier dictionaries are included even when we are not in a position to verify them along with the quotation given there. Naturally such entries are few and are given in square brackets with the indication of the work from which they are taken. The same procedure is followed when we find that a meaning is assigned to a word which cannot be verified.
A. M. GHATAGE

Page #35

Page #36

ABBREVIATIONS OF BOOKS QUOTED IN THE PRAKRIT DICTIONARY
Abbreviation
Abbişe.
AdiSta.( D.)
AdiSta. Ra ) AdiTraBha.
AgDam.
Aiņāca.
AjjhMaPar.
AjiSaTha:( Dha.) AjiSa Tha.(N.)
Akkbá MaKo.
Alankā Ra.
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor elc. Mode of Reference Abhiseka, Bbāga, Bhāsapatakacakra, pp. 321-369, POS, 54, Act. Vorse, Lind
C. R. Devadbar, Poona, 1937. Adidevastava, Devendra, JSS. Vol. I, p. 98. Muni Amar:- Verse No.
vijaya, Ahmedabad, 1922. Adidevastava, Rāmacandra, JSS. Vol. I, p. 92.
Verse No. Adinātbatrayodaśabbavastotra, Dharmaghosa, JSS. Vol. I, Verse No.
p. 106. Agamadambara, Jayanta Bhatta, Dr. V. Raghavan and Prof. Pago. Lino
Apantalal Thakur, Darabbanga, 1964. Aiņābacariya, Jinavallabha, Prakaranasamdoba, p. 4, AS. Verse No.
Ratlam, 1929. Ajjhappamayaparikkha, Yagovijaya, Adīśvara Jaina Temple Verse No.
Trust, Bombay, 9. Ajitaśāntistava, Dharmaghosa, JSS. Vol. I, p. 112.
Verse No. Ajiyasaptitthaya, Nandisena, Saptasmaranastava, pp. 1-13, Vorge No.
Surat, 1942. Akkbāṇamaņikosa, Nemicandra, PrTS. 5, Muni Punyavijaya, Story No. Stanza No.
Varanasi, 1962. Alankāraratnākara, Sobhākaramitra, POS. 77, C. R. Devadhar, Sūtra. Lino
1942. Alankārasarvasva, Ruyyaka, KM. 35, with comm. of Jayaratha, Pago. Line
Pt. Durgā prasāda, K. P. Parab, 1893. Aloyaņākulaya, JAS. 17 ( Part II ), pp. 249-250, Munl Vorso No.
Punyavijaya, Bhojaka, MJV. Bombay, 1987. Alpababutvagarbhitamahāvirastava, Samayasundargani, Verse No.
ĀGRM. 19, Bhavnagar, VS. 1970. Anābisamdhi, Jinaprabba, Samdhikävyasamuccaya, pp. 48-50, Kadavaka. Line
R. M. Shah, LDS. 72, Abmedabad, 1980. Anābimabarisisamdhi, Samdhikavyasamuccaya, pp. 110-117, Kadavaka. Llne
LDS. 72, R. M. Shah, Ahmedabad, 1980. Anargharāghava, Muräri, KM. 5, Pt. Durgāprasada, W..L. Act. Verse. Line
Panshikar, Bombay, 1937. Anandasāvayasaṁdhi, Vinayacandrasuri, Saṁdbikāvyasamuc- Kadavaka. Line
caya, LDS. 72, pp. 65-71, R. M. Shah, Ahmedabad, 1980. Anandasundarī, Ghapaśyama, A. N. Upadhye, Motilal Act. Verse. Line
Banarasidass, Banaras, 1955. Anagārabhatti (Yogibbakti ), Jinendra-Guņa-Samstuti ve Verse No.
Bbakti, Kundakunda, B. G. Khot, Kolba pur, 1959,
AlankaSa.
Aloy Ku.
AlpGaMaSta.
ApāhSam.
AŅĀMahSam.
Anargh Rā.
AnaSaSam.
AnaSun.
ApBha,

Page #37

Abbreviation
đây Vi
AnjaPav.
Anna UnKu
ABSuKab.
Antag. Antaran Sam
Anuog.
Anut Cu Aquttaro.
Appay.(Gr.)
AppViku.
Arihku.
ArahPad. ArabPad (V.)
ArabPag
ArabPal.(Su.)
Arābsā.
AicaCu.
Aura Pace.
Av.
AvCu. Avima.
II
Mode of Reference
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor etc. Angavijja, Muni Punyavijaya, PrTS. I, Banaras, 1957. Aājanā pavanañjaya, Hastimalla, MDJGM. 43, M. V. Act. Verse. Line Patvardhan, Bombay, 1950.
(Adhyāya). Page. Line
Annayaunchakulaya, Anandavijaya, AGRM. 17, Bhavnagar, Verse No. VS. 1979.
Anjanasundarikahanaya, Gunasamṛddhimahattara, Sambodhi, Verse No. Vol. I, No. 2, Shah, Bhojaka, LDS Ahmedabad, 1972. Antagadadasão, P. L. Vaidya, Poona, 1932. Antarangaramdhi. Ratnaprabhagani. Samdhikävyasamuccaya, pp. 72-82. R. M. Shah, LDS. 72, Ahmedabad, 1980. Aquogadara, Aryarakṣita Sthavira:
1] JAS I, pp. 61-205. Muni Punyavijaya, Malvaniya, Bhojaka, MJV. Bombay, 1968.
II] Nava-Suttāni V, pp. 291-421. Yuvacārya Mabaprajña, JVB. Ladnun, 1987.
Sūtra No. Kadavaka. Line
Anuogadāracupni, with Haribhadra's comm., Ratlam, 1928. Anuttarovavaiyadasão, P. L. Vaidya, Poona, 1932. Prākṛtamanidīpa, Appaya Dikṣita, ORIP. Sanskrit Series 92, Prakaraṇa. Sūtra T. T. Shrinivasagopalacarya, Mysore, 1953.
Sūtra No.
Appavischikulaya, JAS. 17 (Part II), MJV. Bombay, MJV. Bombay, Verse No.
1987.
Folio Side, Line
Sūtra No.
Arābanakulaya, JAS. 17 (Part II), p. 244, Punyavijaya, Verse No. Bhojaka, MJV. Bombay, 1987.
Arābaṇāpaḍāgā, JAS. 17 (Part II), Muni Punyavijaya, Verse No. Bhojaka, MJV. Bombay, 1987, (1) 1-84, (2) pp. 85168, ArahPad (V.).
Avimāraka :
1] Meharchanda Lachhmandas, Bak Kunbae, Delhi, 1968.
Arahaṇā pagaraṇa. Abhayadevasūri, JAS. 17 (Part II), pp. Verse No. 22-231, Punyavijaya, Bhojaka, MJV. Bombay, 1987.
Arahaṇāpainnaya, I, II, Sulasa Śrāvaka, JAS. 17 (Part II), Verse No. MJV. Bombay, 1987.
Arābaṇāsāra, Devasena, SJGM. 18, Calcutta.
Acaryacüdamani, Saktibhadra, C. R. Jones, OUP. 1984, Aurapaccakkbäna, I, II, III. JAS. 17 (Part I), pp. 160-163; 305-308;329-336, Punyavijaya, Bhojaka, MJV. Bombay,
1984.
Avassayasutta:
1] Navasuttāņi, pp. 1-23, Yuvacārya Mahaprajña, 1] Av. Sūtra No. JVB. Ladnun, 1987.
21 JAS. 15, pp 331-358, Punyavijaya, Bhojaka, MJV. 2] Sūtra No. Bombay, 1977.
Avasasayacunni, Junadasagani, ĀS. Ratlam, 1929,
Verse No.
Act. Verse. Line
Verse No.
Page. Line
Act. Verse. Line

Page #38

Abbreviation
AvNi.
AvSuSam.
AvŢI.(H.)
Ayir.
AyarBhs.
AyarCo.
Ayar Das.(Dasa.) Ayar Ni.
AyarŢI.
BāAņu.
BalCa.
BālRām.
BanSām.
BhaĀrā.
Bhag Ajju. Bhavika.
Bhāv Pā.
BhāvSam.
Bhava TraSta. Bharat (Gr.)
III
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor etc. 2] Bhasanaṭakacakra, pp. 109-190, C. R. Devadhara, POS. 54, Poona, 1937.
Avassayanijjutti:
1] Bhadrabahu with Jinadasa's Curni, AS. Ratlam, 1929. 2] Bhadrabahu with Haribhadra's Tikā, ĀS. SiddhantaSamgraha I, Mehsana, 1916.
Ayara :
1] Walter Schubring, JSSGM. Ahmedabad, VS. 1980. 2] Angasuttani (i) pp. 1-250, Muni Nathmal, JVB. Ladnun, VS. 2031.
3] JÄS. 2, Muni Jambūvijaya, MJV. Bombay, 1977. 4] Hermann Jacobi, London, 1882.
Avantisukumālasamdhi, Ratnaprabhasūri, Samdhikavyasamuc- Kaḍavaka. Line caya, pp. 37-42, R. M. Shah, LDS 72, Ahmedabad, 1980. Avassayaṭīkā, Haribhadra, AS. Siddhanta-Samgraha I, Folio. Side. Lite Mehsana, 1916.
Mode of Reference
Verse No.
Śrutaakandha. Adhyay
1] Uddeśa. Sūtra
2] Adhyaya, Sutra
3; Sūtra No.
Ayariyabhatti, Kunda kunda, Jinendra-gupa-samstuti va Bhakti, Verse No. pp. 43-47, B. G. Khot, Kolhapur, 1959.
Acaranga Cürni, Rṣabhadeva Kesarimal Pedhi, Ratlam, 1914. Ayäradsão, Yuvacārya Maháprajña, JVB. Ladnun, 1987. Ayara ganijjutti, Bhadrababu, AS. Mehsana, 1916. Ayäranga Tikk, Silanka, AS. Mehsann, 1916. Barasaṇuvekkhā, Kundakunda, MDJGM. 17, Pannalal Soul, Verse No.
Folio. Side. Line
Bombay, VS. 1977.
Act. Verse. Line
Page. Line
Daśā. Sūtra Niryukti No.
Balacarita, Bhasa :
1] Dr. V. Raghavan, Munshi Ram Manohar Lal, Dethi.
2] Dr. H. Weller, Leipzig, 1922.
3
Bhasanaṭakacakra, pp. 511-560, C. R. Devadhara, POS. 54, Poona, 1937.
Balaramayana, Rajaskhara, CSGM. 70, Gangaprasada Ray, Act. Verse. Line Varanasi, 1986.
Bandhasamitta, Devendra with Svopajñavṛtti (Karmagrantha Verse No. III. pp. 98-111), AJGRM. 85, Caturavijayaji, Bhavanagar, 1934.
Bhagavati Aradhana, Acarya Sivakoti, DDJGM. 2, Karanja, Verse No.
1935.
Bhagavadajjukiya, Bodhayana, Prabhat Shastri, Allahabad, 6. Bhavisatta kaha, Dhanapala, GOS. 20, Dalal, Gune, Baroda,
Page. Line
Kaḍavaka. Line
1967.
Bhavapahuḍa, Kundakunda, SDJS. Pannalal Jain, Mahavirji, Verse No.
1968.
Bhāvanā Samdhi, Jayadevamuni, Samdhikavyasamuccaya, pp. Kaḍavaka. Line 90-95, LDS. 72, R. M. Shah, Ahmedabad, 1980. Bhavatrayīstavanam, Dharmaghosa, JSS. Vol. I, p. 268. Natyasastra, Bharata, Manamohana Ghosa, Calcutta, 1967.
Verse No. Adhyaya. Verse No.

Page #39

IV
Abbreviation
BhattaP.
100A
Bhaya Tho.
BhuvKevCA.
BodPa.
BraCaPari.
Bph Kapp
BỊK Sama
BțSamgra.
Bruchstücke.
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor etc. Mode of Reference Bhattaparipnā, Vīrabhadra, JĀS. 17 (Part I), pp. 312-328, Verse No.
MJV. Punyavijaya, Bhojaka, Bombay, 1984. Bhayaharathotta, Mānatunga, JSS. Vol. II, p. 14, Muni Verse No.
Caturavijaya, PJSG. 4, Ahmedabad, 1936. Bhuvaṇabhāņukevalicariya, Indrahamsagani, LDS. 54, Muni Verse No.
Ramanikvijaya, Ahmedabad, 1976. Bodbapāhuda, Kundakunda, SDJS. Pannalal Jain, Mahavirji, Verse No.
Rajasthan, 1968. Brahmacaryaparikarana, A. C. Nahata, B. L. Nahata, AJGM. Verse No.
11, Calcutta, VS. 1997. Kappasutta (cheya). W. Schubring, in Devanāgarī, s. M. Uddesa. Sūtra
Modi, JSSGM. Poona, 1923. Brhatkşetrasamāsa, Jinabhadragaại Ksamāsramana, JDPS. Verse No.
Bhavnagar, VS. 1977. Bịhatsamgrabani, Jinabhadragani Ksamasramana, JÁGRM. Verse No.
47, Bhavnagar, VS. 1973. Bruchstücke Buddhistischer Dramen, Heinrich Lüders, Berlin, Page. Line
1911. Caccarī, Jipadatta, Apabbramsa-Kāvya-trays, GOS. XXXVII, Verse No.
L. B. Gandbi, Baroda, 1927. Caitanyacandrodaya, Karnapura, KM. Kedaranatba, Pansi- Act. Verse. Line
kara, Bombay, 1917. Candavejjbaya :
Verse Line 1] Punyavijaya, Bhojaka, JAS. 17 (Part 1), pp. 63-89,
MJV. Bombay, 1984. 2) Ed. Colette Caillat, Institut de civilisation indienne,
Paris, 1971. Prakrtalaksana, Capda, CSGM. 25, Muni Darkapavijaya, Vidhana No. Sutra No.
Gujratha, 1936. Canda kausika, Ksemīśvara, VBSGM. 126, Caukbamba Vidya. Act. Verse. Line
bhavan, Jagadish Mishra, Varanasi, 1965. Candakevalīcariya, Siddhassi, Namaskārasvādhyāya, pp. 452- Verse No.
456, JSVM. Tattvänandavijaya, Bombay, 1961, Candalebā, Rudradāsa, BVG. 6, A. N. Upadhye, Bbāratiya Act. Verse. Lino
Vidyabhavana, Bombay, 1945. Candappabacariu, Yasahkīrti, Vīraseva Mandir Trust, B. C. Saṁdbi. Kadavaka. Lino
Jain Bhaskara, Beepa ( Sagar), 1986. Candraprabhasaptabhavastotra, Dharmaghosa, JSS. Vol. I, Verse No.
Cacc.
CaitaCa.
Cand.
Canda.(Gr.)
Cand Kau.
CandKoCa.
1901.
Candle.
CapdappaCa.(Y.)
CandraSto.
p. 107.
Cari Bha.
CariPa.
Carittabbatti, Kundakunda, Jipendra-guņa-samstuti va Bhakti, Verse No.
B.G. Khot, Kolhapur, 1959. Carittapāhuda, Kundakunda, SDJS. Pandalal Jain, Maha- Verse No.
virji. Rajasthan, 1968. Carudatta, Bhāsa, Bbāsanātakacakra, pp. 121-248, POS. 54, Act. Verse. Line
C. R. Devadhara, Poona, 1937.
Carnd.

Page #40

Abbreviation
CatuJināSta.
Catur JinaSta.
CaupCa.
CaurBhaSam.
CauSar.
CauViJiThu.
Ceiy Van Bha.(S.)
Ceiy VanBha.
Chakkammu.
ChaGa.
ChanAnuŠA
ChandKo.
ChanLa.
Chapā.
ChePi.
CheSath.
. Dam Pā.
DamSa.
Dand Pra.
Dan Vi. DariNly.
Dasā.
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor etc.
Catuḥstrimajjinātijayastavana, Jinacandra, JSS. Vol. I,
p. 81.
Caturviniatijinastavana, Jinacandra, JSS. Vol. I, p. 83. Cauppannamahāpurisacariya, Ślänka, PrTS. 3, Bhojaka,
Varanasi, 1961.
Caurangabhāvanasamdhi, Jinaprabha, Samdhikavyasamuccaya, Kadavaka. Line pp. 56-64, LDS. 72, R. M. Shah, Ahmedabad, 1980.
Causarana (I), Virabhadra, JĀS. 17 (Part I), Punyavijaya, Verse No. Bhojaka, MJV. Bombay, 1934.
Ceiyavandanabhása, Sri Prakaranärtba, pp. 28-36, Ahmedabad,
VS. 1988.
Cauvisajiņathui, Prakaranasamdoha, pp. 46-56, AS. Ratlam, Verse. No. 1929.
Mode of Reference
Verse No.
Celyavandanamababbāsa, Santisüri, JAS. AGRM. 69, Bhav- Verse No. nagar, VS. 1977.
Verse No.
Page. Line
Chakkammuvaesa, Amarakirti Oriental Institute, GOS. Samdhi. Kadavaka. Line Baroda, 1992.
Chappannayagahão,
Shivaji University, Sanskrit Prakrit Verse No. Series 3, A. N. Upadhye, Kolhapur, 1970.
Chandon usasana, Hemacandra, SJGM. 49, BVB. H. D. Page. Line Velankar, Bombay, 1961.
Chandakcia, Ratnasekharsürl, Kavidarpana, pp. 99-110, Verse No. RPGM. 62, H. D. Velankar, Jodhapur, 1962.
Chandolakṣaṇāni, Jinsprabha, RPGM. 62, H. D. Velankar, Verse No. Jodhapur, 1962.
Chappahuḍa, Kundakunda, MDJGM. 17, Pannalal Soni, Verse No. Bombay, VS. 1977.
Dandakaprakaraṇa, Gajarājamuni, YVJSP. Mehsana, 1916. Dänavibi, Prakaranasaṁdoha, p. 35, AS. Ratlam, 1921. Darsananiyama, Prakaranasandoha, p. 16, AS. Ratlam, 1929, Das suyakkbanda :
1] AAP. Muni Kamala, Rajasthan, 1977.
Cheyapinda, Indranandiyogindra, cf. Prayaścittasamgraha, Verse No. pp. 1-75, MDJGM. 18, Pannalal Soni, Bombay, VS.
1978.
2] Navasuttāņi (5), Yuvacārya Mahāprajña, pp. 425491, JVB. Ladnun, 1987.
Cheyasattha, Anonymous, cf. Prayaścittasamgraha, pp. 76-103, Verse No. MDJGM. 18, Pannalal Soni, Bombay, VS. 1978.
Damsanapahuda, Kundakunda, SVDJS. Pannalal Jain, Rajas- Verse No. than, 1968.
Damsaṇasara, Devasena, JGRK. Nathuram Premi, Bombay, Verse No. VS. 1974.
3] Ayāradasão, in Drei Chedasūtras des Jaina-Kanons,
W. Schubring, Colette Caillet, Hamburg, 1966.
Verse No.
Verse No.
Daśā. Sūtra / Verse No.

Page #41

VI
Abbreviation
Dasave.
DasaveCu.
DasaveNi.
DavSam.
DeNamā.
DeveNa Pra.
Dev Tha.
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor etc. Mode of Reference Dasa veyaliyasutta :
Adhyayada. Uddeśa 1] W. Schubring, Ahmedabad, 1932. 2] JĀS. Punyavijaya, Bbojaka, MJV. Bombay, 1977. 3) With Haribhadra's Vivarana, Nirnayasāgata)
Bombay, 1918. 4) Navasuttāni (5), Yuvācārya Mabaprajña, JVB.
Ladoun, 1987. Desaveyaliyacunni (1, 11):
Verse No. 1] Jioadāsagani, with Bhadrabahu's Niryukti, Jain
Bandbu Press, Indore, 1933. 2) Agastikasimba, PrtS. 17, Punyavijaya, Ahmedabad,
1973. Dasaveyālıyanijjutti, Bhadrabābu, PrtS. 17, Punyavijaya, Chaper. Verse. Lido
Ahmedabad, 1973. Davvasamgaha, Nemicandra, SBJ. VI. H. C. Ghoshal, Arrah, Page. Line
1917. Desināmamälā, Hemacandra, BSS. 17, Pischel; Ramaunja- Varga. Verse No.
swami, BORI. Poona, 1938. Devendranarakendraprakarana, Candrasūri, AGRM. 74, Verse No.
Caturavijaya, Bhavnagar, 1922. Devindatthaya, JĀS. 17, Punyavijaya, Bhojak, MJV. Bombay, Verse No.
1914. Dhammovaesamālā, Jayasimha, SJGM. 28, BVB. Bombay, Verse No.
1949. Dhammaparikkhā, Harişeņa, Dr. Bhagacandra Jain, Prof. M. Samdhi. Kadavaka. Line
Ranadive, Nagpur, 1990. Dhammarayanapagarasa, śāntisūri, JĀGM. 54, Bhavnagar, Verse No.
VS. 1982. Dhammasamghayani, Haribhadra, DLJP. 42, Bombay, 1918. Verse No. Dhammavibipagaran, Sriprabba, HFL. 23, Ahmedabad, 1924. Verse No. Dhultakkhāņa, Haribhadra, SJGM. 19, Jinavijaya Muni, Kathapaka. Verse No.
BVB. Bombay, 1944. Dhvanyaloka, Anandavardbana, with comm. Locana, KSS. Uddyota. Sloka. Verse No. 135, 1940.
Page. Line
(for Výtti and Locana) Dinasuddhi, Srījainajyotirgranthasamgraba, Kşamāvijayagani Verse No.
NSP. Bombay, 1938. Dīvasāgarapannatti, Samgabanīgāhão, JĀS 17 (Part I), Verse No.
pp. 257-279, MJV. Punyavijaya, Buojak, Bombay, 1984. Dubsma kalastavana, Dharmaghosa, JSS. Vol. I, p. 269. Verse No. Dutaghatotkaca, Bhasa, Bhāsanāțakacakra, pp. 459-476, POS. Act. Verse. Lino
54, C. R. Devadbar, Poona, 1937. Dvāsaptatijipastotra, Tilakacandra, JSS. Vol. I, p. 77. Verse No. Dvādasakulaka, Jinavallabba, JSPPF. 37, Muoi Sukhasāgar, Kulaka. Verse No.
Bombay, 1937.
Dhammoma.
Dhamlar.
Dbam RaPa.
DhamSam. Dham ViPa. Dhutt.
Dhvanya.
DinSu.
DISĀPan.
Duḥskā Sta. DūtGba.
DvāJiSto. Dväku.

Page #42

Abbreviation
DvaPaku.
Gaccha.
Gan BhaPra.
GaniVi,
GanSadSa.
Gā Rako.
GāSäh. GaSaSa.
Gāthā La.
Gaud Va.
GauSto.
GayaSam.
Gom Să (J.) (K.)
Goy Tha.
Gur ParTho.
GurTaVi.
GurVanBha.
HammiMaMa.
HasCu.
Hem.(Gr.).
HemSuSam.
IriVa.
Iry K1.
VII
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor etc.
DvadagangÏpadapramäṇakalaka, Jinabhadrasüri, JSS. Vol. 1,
p. 88.
Gaccbācāra, JAS. 17 (Part I), pp. 337-49, MJV. Punya- Verse No. vijaya, Bhojaka,
Gängeyabhangaprakarana, Vijayagani, AVGM. 4, Bhavnagar, Verse No.
1916.
Ganiviija, JAS. 17 (Part I), pp. 93-98, MJV. Punyavijaya, Verse No. Bhojaka, Bombay, 1984.
Gāthālakṣaṇam, Nanditadhya, RPGM. 62, H. D. Velankar, Jodhpur, 1962.
Mode of Reference
Ganaharasaddhasayaya, Jinadatta, Apabhramsa-kavya-trayī, Verse No. GOS 37, pp 97-106, Baroda, 1927.
Gaharayarako, Jinevarasürl, LDS. 52, Bhojaka, Shaha, Gatha No.
Ahmedabad, 1975.
Gābāsäha si, Samayasundaragani, JSPPF. 43, Bombay, 1940. Gahasattasal, Hala, Radhagovinda Basak, Asiatic Society,
1971.
Gautamastotra, Jinaprabha, JSS. Vol. I, p. 235.
Gayasuumalas-mdhi, Ratnaprabhasuri, Samdhikavyasamuccaya, pp. 20-29, LDS. 7?, Ahmedabad, 1980.
Gatha No. Śataka. Gāthā No.
Gauḍavaho, Vakpatiräja, PrTS. 18, N. G. Suru, Ahmedabad, Verse No.
1975.
Verse No.
Verse No.
Kadavaka Line
Gommaṭasara, Nemicandra Siddhantacakravarti, J. L. Jaini, Verse No. Jivakanda, Karmakanda, Lucknow, 1927.
Goyamatthava Jinaprabha, JSS. Vol. I. pp. 235-37. Verse No. Gurupäratantathotta, Saptasmaranastava, pp. 29-35, JSPPF. Verse No.
Surat, 1942.
Gurutattavinicchaya, Yasovijayagani, JAGRM. 78, Catur- Ullasa. Verse No. vijaya, Bhavnagar, 1925.
Guruvandanabhāṣya, Śri-Prakaranaratna, pp. 36-42, Ahmeda- Verse No. bad, VS 1988.
HammIramadamardana, Jayasimhasūri, GOS. 10, C. D. Dalal, Act. Verse. Line Baroda, 1920.
Hasyacuḍāmani, Vatsaraja, Rūpakaṣaṭkam, pp. 118-149, Act. Verse. Line GOS. 8, C. D. Dalal, Baroda, 1918.
Prakṛta Vyakarana, Hemacandra, BSPS. LX, P. L. Vaidya, Päda. Sūtra BORI. Poona, 1958.
Hematilakasurisamdhi, Samdbikävyasamuccaya, pp 101-104. Kadavaka. Line Iriyavahiyaviyāra, Dharmasigaragani, iryapathikisattrimsika, Verse No. pp. 38-40, AS. 49, Bombay, 1927. Iryapathikimithyaduskṛtakulaka, Prakarapasamdoha, p. 41, Verse No. AS. Ratlam, 1929.

Page #43

VIII
Abbreviation
IsiBbās,
Jag SuMā. JambūCa.(G.)
Jambuddi.
JambuddiSam.
Jambuddi Samgha.
Jambu SaCa.
Ján Pa.
JasCa. Jay Dbav.
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor etc. Mode of Reference Isibbāsiyās :
Adhyayana. Line 1) W. Schubring, Pt. Malvaniya, LDS. 45, Ahmeda
bad, 1974. 2] JAS. 17 (Part 1), pp. 182-256, Punyavijaya,
Bhojaka, MJV. Bombay, 1984. Jagatsundariprayogamālā, Dhuliya, Vs. 1993.
Topic No. Verse No. Jambucariya, Gunapāla, SJGM. 44, Jipavijaya Mudi, BVB. Uddeśa. Verse No. Bombay, 1959.
ProsePage. Line Jambuddivapannatti, Uvangsuttani 4 (Part II), pp. 357-588, Vakkbāra. Sutra
Yuvācārya Mabāprajña, JVB. Ladnun, 1989. Jambuddivapennattisamgaba, Padmanandi, JRJGM. 7, L. C. Uddesa. Verse No.
Jain, B. C. Siddhanta Shastri, Sholapur, 1958. Jambuddīvasaṁghayani, Haribhadrasūri, JDPS. Bhavnagar, Verse No.
1915. Jambūsāmicariu, Virakavi, BJP. JMJGM. 7, Vimalaprakash Samdhi. Kadavaka. Line
Jain, Varanasi, 1968 Jāpakiparinaya, Rāmabhadra Diksita, Laksmanasūri, Tanjore, Act. Verse. Line
1906. Jasabaracariu, Puspadapta, BJP. BJMGM. 11, 1972. Sanidbi. Kadavaka. Line Jayadhavalä, Kaşayapābuda Tikā, Vīrasena, Jinasena, JSUF. Vol. Page. Line
H. L. Jain, Amaravati. Jayatibuanathuya, BORI. Collection, 1871-72, No. 285. Verse No. Jbānasaya. Jinabhadra Ksamäsramana, comm, by Haribhadra. Verse No.
in AvNiȚ. by Haribhadra, pp. 580-612. Jinadattākhyānadvaya, 1) Sumatisūri 2) Anonymous, SJGM. Page. Line
27, BVB. A. M. Bhojaka, Bombay, 1953. Jinastotra (Abbāņa kastotra ), Jinacandra, JSS Vol. I, p. 78. Verse No. Jinathui, BORI, 1880-81, 77 10).
Folio. Line Jīvābhigama, Uvangaguttaņi 4 (Part I), pp. 215-515, JVB. Padivatti. Sūtra No.
Yuvācārya Mabaprajña, Ladnun, 1987. Jivāpusatthisardhi, Jinaprabha, Saṁdhikävyasamuccaya, pp. Kadavaka. Line
51-52, LDS. 72, R. M. Shah, Abmedabad, 1980. Jivāņusāsana, Devasūri, HeGr. 17, Prabhudas, Ahmedabad, Verse No.
1928. Jivadayaprakarana, Prakaranasamdoba, p. 27, AS. Ratlam, Verse No.
1929. Jīvasamāsa, AS. 50, Indore, 1927.
Verse No. Jivaviyāra, Sāntisūri, JĀPM. Agra, VS. 1986.
Verse No. Jivaviyaratthavana, Dharmaghosa, JSS. Vol. I, p. 262. Verse No. Jiyakappa, Jinabhadra, JSSGM. 7, Jinavijaya, Ahmedabad, Verse No.
1926. Jiyakappabhasa, Jinabbadra, Ed. Punyavijaya, Ahmedabad, Verse No.
1937.
Jay Tihu. JhāņSa.
Jinada Akhyā.
JinaSto. JlaThu. Jivābhi.
JivāņuSam.
JivAnu.
Jiva Pra.
JivSa. Jiv Viy. Jiv Viy Tha. Jiy Kapp
Jiy KappBha.

Page #44

Abbreviation
Jiy KappCu.
JñaSto. JogNa. Jogsā. Joiska.
Jon Tha. JSS.
JugāJiCa.
Kahan Ko Kahara Ko.
Kako.
Kako Pra.
Kalka.
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor etc. Mode of Reference Jiyakappacunni, Siddhasenagani, JSSGM. 7, Jinavijaya, Page. Line, (Prose) Ahmedabad, 1926.
(Verse No.) Jñānastotra, Jinacandra, JSS. Vol. I, p. 87.
Verse No. Joganandi, JĀS. I. 54, 55, MJV. Punyavijaya, Bombay, 1968. Sūtra No. Jogasāra, A. N. Upadhye, Bombay, 1937.
Verse No. Joisakarandaga, JĀS. 17 (Part I). pp. 361-408, MJV. Verse No.
Punyavijaya, Bhojaka, Bombay, 1984. Jonittbya, Dharmaghosa, AGRM.
Verse No. Jainastotragamdoba, Vol. I. II, PJSG. 1. Muni Amarvijaya, Page, Line
Ahmedabad, 1932. Jugāijinindacariya, Vardhamāpasūri, LDS. 104, R. K. Paga- Page. Line
riya Ahmedabad, 1987. Kabānayakosa, cf. Ka KoPra.
Story. Verse Kahārayana kosa, Devabhadra, Ed. Punyavijaya, Atmānanda- Kathanaka. Verse sabbā, Bhavnagar, 1944.
( Page. Line) Kabākosu, Sricandra, PrTS. 13, Hiralal Jain, Ahmedabad, Samdhi. Kadavaka. Lino
1969. Katbākośaprakaraṇa, Jinesvara, SJGM. 11, BVB. Jinavijaya Page. Lino
Mupi, Bombay, 1949. Kāla kācāryakatbānaka, W. Norman Brown, pp. 1-86, Wash- Page. Lino
ington, 1933. Kālakācāryakathānaka, Bhavadeva, W. Norman Brown, Verse No.
pp. 87-92, Wasington, 1933. Kāla kācāryakathānaka, Dharmaprabba Sūri, W. Norman Verse No.
Brown, pp. 92–101, Washington, 1933. Kalpalatāviveka, Anonymous, LDS. 17, Nagar, Shastry, Page. Lino
Ahmedabad, 1968. Kälasarūvakulaka, Jinadatta, Apabhraṁsakävyatrayi, GOS. Verse No.
37, pp. 67-80, Baroda, 1927. Kammapayadi, Nemicandra, JMJGM. 11, Hiralal Šāstrī, Verso No.
Varanasi, 1964. Kammapayadı, Sivasarman, Vijayapremsūri, Dabbol, Pago. Line.
Gujrath. Kammapayaļīcunni, Vijayapremsūri, Dabhoi, Gujrath. Folio. Side, Line Karmastava (Karmagrantba II), ĀJGRM. 85, pp. 66-97, Verse No.
Caturvijaya, Bhavnagar, 1934. Kassavaho, Rămapāņivāda, HGRK. A. N. Upadhye, Canto. Verse
Bombay, 1940. Kammavivāga (Karmagrantha I). Devendra, AJGRM. 85, Verse No.
pp. 1-65, Caturvijaya, Bhavnagar, 1934. Kappüramañjari, Rājasekhara, HOS. MB., S. Konow, Delhi, Act. Verso. Lige
1963.
KālKa.(Bhav.)
Kalka.( Dharm.)
KalpVi.
KalSa Ku.
KamPay.(N.)
KamPay.(S.)
Kam PayCu. KamTh.(D.)
KamsVa
Kam Vi.(D.)
KapMan.
P. D. II

Page #45

Abbreviation
Kapp. J. Th. S.
KappBhā.
Kappi. KappNI,
KappVad.
KarCa.
Karga Bbi.
KarpaSu.
KarpCaBha.
KarVajr.
KasaPā.
KattiAqu.
Kätyä. (Gr.)
Kaum Mi.
KaumuMa.
KaviDar.
Kävyälan.(Ru.)
Kāvyānu.(He.)
Kāvyānu (Va.)
Kavya Pra
KesiGoSam.
X
Name of the Bock, Author, Edition, Editor etc.
Kalpasutra:
1] Jinacariya, Theravali, Sāmāyārī, H. Jacobi, AKM. 7, 1. Leipzig, 1879.
2] Ed. K. C. Lalwani, MB. Delhi, 1979.
3] Pajjusanākappa with comm. Kiranavali by Dharmadasagani, AJGRM. 71, Bhavnagar, 1922. Kappabhasa (Bṛhatkalpasūtra), Samghada sagani, AJGRM. 82, Caturvijaya, Punyavijaya, Bhavnagar, 1935. Kappiya, cf. Nirayavaliyão, P. L. Vaidya Poona, 1932. Kappanijjutti, Bhadrabahu, AJGRM. 82, Caturvijaya, Punyavijaya, Bhavnagar, 1933.
Kappavadimsiyão, cf. Nirayāvaliyão, P. L. Vaidya, Poona, 1932.
Karakaṇḍacariu, Kanakamara, ACDJGM. 4, Hiralal Jain, Karanja, 1934.
Kattigeyāṇuvekkha, Svami Kumāra, RJSM. A. N Upadhye,
Agas, Gujrat, 1960.
Mode of Reference
Sūtra No.
Verse No.
Sūtra No. Verse No.
Sūtra No.
Karṇabhāra, Bhasa, Bhāsanāṭakacakra, POS. 54, C. R. Devadhar, Poona, 1937. Karnasundari
Bilhana, KM. 7, Pt. Durgāprasāda, K. P. Parab, Bombay, 1932. Karpuracaritabhāna, Vatsaraja, Rūpakaşaṭkam, pp. 23-35,
C. D. Dalal, Baroda, 1918. Karuṇāvajrayudha. Balacandrasuri, JAGRM. 56, Caturvijaya, Act. Verse. Line Bhavnagar, 1916.
Samdbi. Kaḍavaka. Line
Verse. Line
Kasayapābuḍa, Guṇadhara, ŚDJJJS. Sumeruchandra Divakar, Verse No. Phaltan, 1968.
Act. Verse. Line
Act. Verse. Line
Verse No.
Prākṛtamañjarī, Katyayana, NSP. Mukunda Sharma, Bombay, Pariccheda. Sūtra. Verse 1918.
Kaumudimitrānanda, Ramacandra, JAS. 59, Punyavijaya, Act. Verse. Line
Bhavnagar, 1917.
Kaumudīmahostava, Vijjaka, DBGS(M). 4, M. Ramkrishna Act. Verse. Line Kavi, S. K. Ramnath Sastri, 1929.
Kavidarpana, Anonymous, RPGM. 62, H. D. Velankar, Uddeśa. Gatha No. Jodhpur, 1962.
Kavyalankara, Rudrața, KM. 2, Pt. Durgaprasad, W. L. Adhyaya. Śloka Pansikar, 1886.
Kavyanusāsana, Hemacandra, KM. 70, Śivadatta, K. P. Parab, Page. Line
1934.
Kävyänugasana, Vägbhata, KM. 43, Sivadatta, K. P. Parab, Page, Line
1894.
Kavyaprakāśa, Mammața, BORI. R. D. Karmarkar, Poona, Page. Line 19:0.
Kesigoyamasamdhi, Samdhikavyasamuccaya, pp. 83-89, LDS. Kadavaka. Line 72, R. M. Shah, Ahmedabad, 1980.

Page #46

XI
Abbreviation
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor etc.
Mode of Reference
KhanKu.
KhavSā.
KirātVya.
Krama.(Gr.)
KumaCa.(H.)
Kumā Pra.
KummCa. Kunda Mā.
KuvMāka.
La AjiSaSta.
LabSā.
Lagnasu.
Khaptikulaya, Vasudevasūri, Prakaraṇasamdoha, p. 18, AS. Verse No.
Ratlam, 1929. Kbavaņāsāra, Nemicandra, GHDJGM. 5, G. Jain, S. Jain, Verse No.
Calcutta. Kirātārjudīyavyāyoga, Vatsarāja, Rūpa kasatkam, pp. 1-21, Page. Lino
C. D. Dalal, Baroda, 1918. Saṁksiptasāra (Prākstādbyāya), Kramadīśvara, S. R. Banerjee, Kärya. Sutra.
PrTS. 22, Ahmedabad, 1980. Kumārapālacarita, Hemacandra, BSS. 60, NSP. S. P. Sarga. Verse No.
Pandita, Bombay, 1900. Kumārapālapratibodha, Somaprabha, GOS. 14, Jinavijaya, Page. Line
Baroda, 1920. Kummaputtacariya, Jinamāņikya, P. L. Vaidya, Poona, 1930. Verse No. Kundamåla, Dinnāga, CSCRS. 28, Kalikumar Datta, Calcutta, Act. Verse. Lino
1964. Kuvalayamālākahā, Udyotapasūri, SJGM. 45, BVB. A. N. Page. Lino
Upadhye, Bombay, 1959. Lagbu-Ajita-Sāntistava or Ullasikkamathotta, Saptasmarana- Verse No.
stava, pp. 14-21, JSPPF. 46, Surat, 1942. Labdhisāra. Nemicandra, GHDJGM. 5, G. Jain, S. Jain, Verse No.
Calcutta. Lagnasuddhi, Srījainajyotirgranthasamgraha, Kşamāvijayagani, Verse No.
NSP. Bombay, 1918. Labunandi, JAS. 1, pp. 49-53, MJV. Punyavijaya, Bombay, Sūtra No.
1968. Laghuksetrasamāsa, Ratnasekhara, ĀGRM. 46, Bombay, Vs. Verse No.
1972. Sadbhäşacandrikā, Laksmīdhara, BSPS. 71, K, P. Trivedi, Adhyāya. Pāda. Sutra
Bombay, 1916. Lalitamädbava, Rūpagosvāmi, KSGM. 190, Babulala Shukla Act. Verse. Line
Shastri, Varanasi, 1959. Laghunavakāraphala, Jipacandra, Prakaranasamdoha, p. 44, Verse No.
AS. Ratlam, 1929. Laghusanghayaņi, In Prakaranaratna, pp. 24-28, Ahmedabad, Verse No.
VS. 1988. Lingapāhuda. Kundakunda. Satprābhstādisamgraha, pp. 38C- Verse No.
384, MDJGM. 17, Paopalal Soni, Bombay, VS. 1977. Līlāvas, Kautūbala, SJGM, 31, BVB. A. N. Upadhye, Verse No.
Bombay, 1949. Loganālibattīsi, Dharmaghosa, AJGM. Ahmedabad. Verse No. Lokāntikadevastavana, Dharmaghoya, JSS. Vol. I, p. 109. Verse No. Lokavijayayantra, Nemicandra Shastri, Varanasi, Virk Verse No.
Samvat 2497.
LahuŅa.
LaKșeSa.(R.)
Laksml.(Gr.)
LaliMa.
LaNavPha.
LaSamgh.
LinPā.
Lila.
LogBat. LokDeSta. LoViYa.

Page #47

Abbreviation
MaBan.
Madhya Vya.
MahaNis.
Maha Mañ.
Maha Pacc.
Maha Pu.(P.)
Maha ViCa. ManipaCa
ManipaCa.(H.)
Manoka.
Māla Mā.
Mālavikā.
MalliJiSta. MallMak.
MaranVi.
Märk. (Gr.)
MatViPra.
MaViCaG.)
MaVICaSto.
MaVIKa.
MaViSto.
MayaParaca.
XII
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor etc.
Mode of Reference
Mababandha, Bhutabali, JMJGM. Sumeruchandra Diwakar, Vol. Page. Line Kashi, 1947.
Madhyamavyāyoga, Bhasa, Bhāsanāṭakacakra, pp. 421-440, Page. Line POS. 54, C. R. Devadhar, Poona, 1937.
Mahānisība:
1] I-V, J. Deleu, W. Schubring, Hamburg, 1963. 2] VI-VIII, F. R. Hamm, W. Schubring, Hamburg, 1951.
Mahārthamañjarī, Maheśvarananda, Yogatantra-granthamālā, Verse No. Varanasi, 1972.
Mahāpaccakkhāṇa, JĀS. 17 (part I), pp. 164-169, MJV. Verse No. Punyavijaya, Bhojaka, Bombay, 1984.
Adhyana. Section [Verse No.) Addhyana. Section (Verse No.)
Mahāpurāṇa, Puspadanta, MDJG. 73, P. L. Vaidya, Bombay, Samdni, Kaḍavaka. Line
1937.
Mahāvīracarita, Bhavabhuti, OUP. Todar Mall, London, 1928. Manipaticarita, Anonymous, RAS. R. Williams, Great Britain,
1959.
Mälavikāgnimitra, Kalidasa, K. A. Subramania Iyer, New Delhi, 1977.
Mapipaticarita, Haribbadra, RAS. R. Williams, Great Britain, Verse No. 1959.
Manoramakaba, Vardhamanasuri, LDS. 93, R. K. Pagariya, Page. Line (Verse No.) Ahmedabad, 1983.
Mallijinastavana, Jinacandra, JSS. Vol. I, p. 369.
Mallikāmakaranda, Ramacandra, LDS. 91, Punyavijaya,
Ahmedabad, 9.
Mālatīmādhava, Bhavabhūti, BSPS. 15, BORI. R. G. Act. Verse. Line Bhandarkar, Poona, 1970.
Page. Line
Verse No.
Act. Verse. Line
Verse No. Act. Verse. Line
Maranavibhatti or Maraṇasamahi, JAS. 17, (Part I), pp. 99- Verse No. 169, MJV. Punyavijaya, Bhojaka, Bombay, 1984.
Prākṛta-Sarvasva, Märkandeya, PrTS. 11, K. C. Acarya, Pāda. Sūtra
Ahmedabad, 1968.
Mattavilasaprahasana, Mahendra Vikrama Varman, TSS. 55, Act. Verse. Line T. Ganapati Sastrī, Trivandrum, 1917.
Mahāvīracariya, Guṇacandra, LDJPS. 75, Bombay, 1929.
Folio. Side, Line (Prastava)
Mahā vīracaritastotra, Jinavallabha, Prakaraṇasamdoha, p. 10, Verse No. AS Ratlam, 1929.
Mahavirakalna (Apabramismaya), Dharmaghosa, JSS, Verse. No. Vol. I, p. 257.
Mahāvīrastotra (Virajinathaya), Abhayadeva, JSS. Vol. I, Verse No. p. 197.
Mayaṇaparajayacariu, Harideva, JMJGM. Hiralal Jain, Samdhi. Kadavaka. Line Varanasi, 1944.

Page #48

XIII
Abbreviation
Maya Ra.
Maya Re Sam.
MicDukku.(I, II)
1984
Mit ManthKu.
MokPā.
Mr.c. Mudrā Rā.
Mūlā.
MūSud Pa.
MuSuvraCa.
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor etc. Mode of Reference Mayarabiyatthaya, Saptasmaraṇastava, JSPPF. 46, Surat, Verse No.
1942. Mayaņarebāsaṁdbi, Jinaprabha :
Kadavaka. Line 1] Samdhikävyasamuccaya, pp. 43-47, LDS. 72, R. M.
Shab, Ahmedabad, 1980. 2) Madanarekhā ākhyāyikā, LDS. 39, pp. 169-173,
Becharadas Doshi, Ahmedabad, 1973. Miccbādukkaďakulaya, JĀS. 17 (Part II), pp. 245-246, Verse No.
MJV. Punyavijaya, Bhojaka, Bomboy, 1984. Mitbyātvamanthanakulaka, Prakaranasaṁdoba, p. 45, AS. Verse No.
Ratlam, 1929. Mokkbapāhuda, Kundakunda, MDJGM. 17, Pappalal Soni, Verse No.
Bombay, VS, 1977. Mrccha katika, Sudraka, N. B. Godbole, Bombay, 1896. Act. Line Mudrārāksasa, Visakhadatta, Alfred Hillebrandt, Breslau, Page. Line
1912. Mülācāra Vattakera, JMJGM. 19, K. C. Shastri, Jagan. Verse No. (Adhikara )
Moban Shastri, Pandalal Jain, Bombay, 1984. Mülasuddhipagarana, Pradyumnasūri, PTS. 15, A. M. Verse No. Page. Line
Bhojaka, Abmedabad, 1971, Țikā of Devacandra. Munisuvratasvämicarita, Candrasūri, Pt. Rupendrakumar Verse No.
Pagariya, LDS. 106, Ahmedabad, 1989. Nägānanda, Sriharsa, TSS. 59, T. Ganapati Sāstrī, Trivan- Act. Verso, Line
drum, 1917. Naisadhāpanda, Ksemisvara, ALS. 112, A. K. Warder, Act. Verse. Line
K. Kunjunni Raja, Madras, 1986. Nalavilāsanāțaka, Ramacandra, GOS. 39, G. K. Shirgonde- Act. Verse. Lino
kar, L. B. Gandhi, Baroda, 1926. Namaskārastavana, Anonymous, JSS. Vol. I, P. 44. Verse No. Namakkarattbaya, Jinacandra, Prakaranasamdoba, p. 44, AS. Verse No.
Ratlam, 1929. Namiūņastava Māpatunga, JSPPF. 46, Saptasmaranastava, Verse No.
pp. 21-29, Surat, 1942. Nammayāsundarisaṁdhi, Jinaprabha, Samdbikāvyasamuccaya, Kadavaka. Line
pp. 53-58, LDS 72, R. M. Sbab, Ahmedabad, 1980. Nănācittakaprakarana, Prakaranasamdoha, p. 32, AS, Ratlam, Verse No.
1929. Nandisaraceiyasamthava, Prakaranasamdoba, p. 13, AS. Verse No.
Ratlam, 1929. Nandīsutta, JĀS. 1, pp. 1-48, MJV. Punyavijaya, Bombay, Sūtra No.
1968. Nandīsuttacuņni, Jinadāsagani, PrtS. 9, Punyavijaya, Vara- Page. Line
nasi, 1966. Nānapañcamikahā, Mahesvara, SJGM. 25, BVB. A. S. Kaha No. Verse No.
Gopani, Bombay, 1949.
Nāgā.
Naisa
NalaViNa.
NamaSta. Nama Tha.
NamiuSta.
NamSuSam.
NānCitPra.
NandCeySam,
Nandi.
Nandicu.
NĀPañka.

Page #49

Abbreviation
NatySa
NavPay.
NavTaPra.
Näyä.
NayCa.(P.)
NeNaCa (Ha.)
NeNaCa.(J.)
NeNaNavSto.
NigChat.
Niraya.
Nis.
Nis Bhā.
NisCu.
NivBha.
Niy Sä.
OghaNi. PaccSaru.
PāDo.
Pabara.(Gr.)
PäiLaNa.
XIV
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor etc. Natyagistra, Bharata, M. Ghosh, Calcutta, 1967. Navapaya, Devaguptasuri, DLJP. 68, Bombay, 1929. Navatattvaprakarana, Prakaraṇaratna, pp. 11-18, Ahmedabad, VS. 1988.
Nayadhammakahão:
1] Angasuttāņi 3, JVB. Muni Nathmal, Ladnun, 1974. 2] N. V. Vaidya, Poona, 1940.
3] AS. with Abhayadeva's comm., Mehsana, 1929.
Nayakumaracariu, Puspadanta, DDJGM. 1, Hiralal Jain, Samdhi. Kadavaka. Line Karanja, 1933.
Neminahacariu, Haribhadra, LDS. 25, H. C. Bhayani, M. C. Bhava. Radḍā, Line Modi, Ahmedabad, 1970.
Nisība :
1] Navasuttāni 5, pp. 665-812, JVB. Yuvacarya Mabapranjna, Ladoun, 1987.
Mode of Reference
Adhyaya, Verse
Verse No.
Verse No.
Neminähacariya, Jinavallabha, Prakaraṇasamdoha, p. 7, AS. Verse No.
Ratlam, 1929.
Neminatha-nava-bhava-stotra, Dharmaghosa, JSS. Vol. I, Verse No. p. 109.
Nigoyachattīsī, with comm., DLJP. Surat, VS. 1980.
Nirayavaliyão:
2] Nisiha, Ed. W. Schubring in Vavahara und Nisihasutta, Leipzig, 1918.
Śrutaskandha, Adhyayana.
Sutra
1] P. L. Vaidya, Poona, 1932.
Sūtra No.
2] Uvangasuttani 4 (Part II), pp. 715-740, JVB. Upanga. Sütra Ladnun, 1989.
Nislhacunni, ASRM. 3, Amar Muni, Kanhayyalal Kamal, Delhi, 1982.
Folio. Side. Line
Nisīhabhasa, ASRM. 3, Amar Muni, Kanhayyalal Kamal, Verse No. Delhi, 1982.
Vol. Page. Line
Uddeśa. Sutra
Nivvägabbatti,
Kundakunda, Jinendra-guna-samstuti va bhakti, B. G. Khot, Kolhapur, 1959.
Niyamasara, Kundakunda, KKJSM, 58, Himmatlal Shab, Verse No. Songhar, 1951.
Verse No.
Ohanijjutti, Bhadrabahu, AS. Mehsana, 1919.
Paccakkhanasarūva, Yagodeva, RKS. Ratlam, 1927.
Pabuḍadoba, Rāmasimba, ACDJGM. 3, Hiralal Jain, Karanja,
1933.
Pāuakosa, Paharaa, Mithila University Gr. 21, Dr. Goswami, Pariccheda. Sūtra Darbhanga, 1968.
Paiyalacchinämamālā, Dhanapala, KJGM. 1, B. J. Doshi, Word No. Ahmedabad, 1960.
Verse No.
Verse No.
Doha No.

Page #50

Abbreviation
PajɅrā.
PINāca.(P.)
PāṆāTha.
PañcāCu.
Pañcă Pra.
Pañca Rā.
Pañcatrim JiGusta.
Pañcatthi.
PañGuBha.
Tanha.
PañKalJiThu. Pannav.
Pañ ParTha.
PañSam.(C.)
PañSam.(Dig.) Pa Sam.(Dig.) II PañSu.
PañVa.
Paramapp.
PārsvadeSta.
PärivaJiSta.
Pārsvana Da BhaSto. Pārsvană JiSta.
ParsvanaJiSta.(R.) Pārsvana LaSta.
Pār van Sta.(D.) PäravanaSta.(J.)
XV
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor etc.
Pajjantärähanā. Somasuri, JAS 17 (Part II), MJV. Punyavijaya, Bhojaka, Bombay. 1987. Pāsaṇabacariu, Padmakīrtī, PrTS. 8, P. K. Modi, Varanasi, Samdhi. Kaḍavaka. Line 1965.
Pasaṇāhatthaya, Prakaranasaṁdoha, pp. 7-8, AS. Ratlam, Verse No.
1929.
Palchakacürgi-Ysiodevs, DLJP. 102. Surat, 1952.
Pañcāsaka prakarana. Haribhadra, with Abbayadeva's comm., JDPS. Bhavnagar, 1912
Pañcaratra, Bhasa. Bhāsanāṭakacakra, pp. 373-420, POS. 54. C. R. Devadhar, Poona, 1937. Pañcatrimst-Jinavani-guṇa-stavana, Dharmaghosa, JSS. Verse No.
Vol. I, p. 267
Pañcagurubhakti, Kundakunda, Jinendra-guna-samstuti va bhakti, B. G. Khot, Kolhapur, 1959.
Paphāvāgaranti:
11 JVB. Muni Nathmal, Ladnun. VS. 2031.
2] With Abhaydeva's comm., NSP. Bombay, 1919. Pañcakallaṇajiņatthuya, Jinavallabha, cf. JSS. Vol. I, p. 95. Pannavaņā. JAS. 9, MJV. Punyavijaya Bombay, 1971. Pañcaparameṭṭhithavana, Manatunga, Stotratraya, p. 237, DLJP. 79, R. H. Kapadiya, Bombay 1932. Pañcasamgaha, Candramaharși, AS. 47, Surat, 1927. Pañcasamgaba, JMJGM. 10, Hiralal Jain, Varanasi, 1960. Pañcasamgaha with Paiya-vitti, JMJGM. 10. BJP. p. 541 f. Pañcasutta, Anonymous, BLII. Muni Jambūvijaya, Delhi,
1986.
Mode of Reference
Verse No.
Pañcatthikaya. Kundakunda, KKJSM. 73, H. J. Shah, Son- Gāthā No. gadha, VS. 2014.
Parsvadevastavana, Jayakirti, JSS. Vol. II, p. 129. Pärávajinastavana, Ratnakirti, JSS. Vol. II, p 40. Parsvanatha-dasa-bhava-stotra, Dharmaghosa, JSS. Vol. p. 110. Parvanatha-jina-stavana (navagrahasvaru pagarbhita ), Anonymous, JSS. Vol. II, p. 126.
Pār vanatha-jina-stavana, Ratnakirti, JSS. Vol. II, p. 40. Par vanatha laghu-stava (navagrahastutigarbha ), JSS. Vol. I, p. 288.
Pārsvanätbastavana, Kamalaprabha, JSS. Vol. 1, p. 242. Pārsvanathastavana, Jinavallabha, JSS. Vol. I, p. 93.
Folio. Side. Line
Pañcāśaka No. and Verse
Act. Verse. Line
Verse No.
Pañcavatthuya, Haribhadra, DLJPF. 69, and AS, Surat, Vastu. Gatha No. 1927.
Adhyāya. Sūtra Page. Line Verse No.
Pada. Sūtra No. Verse No.
Paramappapayasu, Yogindudeva, RJSM. 10, A. N. Upadhye, Adhikara. Gatha Bombay, 1937.
Verse No.
Adhikara. Verse No.
Book. Verse (Page. Line) Sutra. Divisions
Verse No.
Verse No.
Verse No.
Verse No.
Verse No.
Verse No.
Verse No. Verse No.

Page #51

Abbreviation
Partha Pa.
Pärva Pa.
PaumCa.(S.)
PaumCa(V.)
PaumSiCa.
PavParl.
PavSä.
Pavsaro.
PlodNI.
PosVi.
PraboCa.
PráPaing.
Prasa Rā.
Prati.
PratiYau.
PriyDa.
PudSatTri. PubCa.
Purus.(Gr.)
Raghu.(Gr.)
Ram Mañ.
RasǎSu.
RasGan.
XVI
Mode of Reference
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor etc. Parthaparakrama, Paramāra Śri Pralhadanadeva, GOS. 4, Act. Verse. Line C. D. Dalal, Baroda, 1917.
Pārvatīpariņaya, Bāṇabhaṭṭa, NSP. V. L. Pausbikar, Bombay, Act. Verse. Line
1916.
Paumacariu, Svayambhu, SJGM. BVB. H. C. Bhayani, Samdhi. Kaḍavaka. Line Bombay, 1953.
Paumacariya, Vimalasuri, H. Jacobi, PrTS. 6, Punyavijaya, Parva. Sloka Varanasi, 1962.
Paumasiricariu, Dhabil, SJGM. BVB. Bhayani, Modi, Samdhi. Line Bombay, 1948.
Pavayanaparikkha, Dharmasagaragani, RKS. Surat, 1937. Pavayaṇasara, Kunda kunda, RJSM. 9, A. N. Upadhye,
Bombay, 1935.
Pavayaṇasaroddhara, Nemicandra, DI.JP. 58, NSP. Bombay, Gāthā No.
1922.
Pindanijjutti, Bhadrababu, DLJP. 105, Surat, 1958.
Verse No.
Posahavihi, Jinavallabha, Prakaraṇasamdoba, p. 40. AS. Verse No. Ratlam, 1929.
Vigrama. Sloka
Adhikara. Gāthā
Prabodhacandrodaya, Krsnamiśrayati, CABP. 20, R. N. Act. Verse. Line Tripathi, Varanasi, 1977.
Prakrtapsingala, PrTS II, B. S. Vyas, Varanasi, 1959. Prasannaraghava, Jayadeva, S. M. Paranjape, N. S. Panse,
Poona, 1894.
Pratima, Bhāsa, Bhāsanāṭakacakra, pp. 249-320, POS. 54, Act. Verse. Line C. R. Devadbar, Poona, 1937. Pratijnayaugandharāyaṇa, Bhāsa, Bhāsanāṭakacakra, pp. 57- Act, Verse. Line
108, POS. 54, C. R. Devadhar, Poona, 1937. Priyadarika, Śrihara
1] N. G. Suru, Poona, 1928.
2 Indo-Iranian Series 10, G. K. Nariman, J. Ogden, Charles, New York, 1923.
Pariccheda. Gāthā
Act. Verse. Line
Act. Verse. Line
Verse No.
Pudgalsattrimhéik, Ratnasimha, with comm. Pabavicandacariya, Säntisüri, PrTS. 16, Ramnikvijaya, Page. Line
Ahmedabad, 1972.
Prakrtänu sana, Purusottama, Luigia Nitti Dolci, Paris, Adhyāya Sätra 1938.
Präkṛtānanda, Raghunatha Kavi, RPGM. 10, Muni Jina- Sutra No. vijaya, Jodhpur, 1962.
Rambhamañjarī, Nayacandrasuri, RIPJA. 14, R. P. Poddar, Act. Verse. Line Vaishali, 1976.
Rasarṇavasudhakara, Singabhüpala, TSS. 50, T. Ganapati Vilasa. Sūtra Sastri, 1916.
Rasagangadhara, Jagannathapandita, KM. 12, with comm. of Page. Line Nagesa and Sarala of Mathuranatha Shastri.

Page #52

Acharya Shri Kailassagarsun Gyanmandir
XVII
Abbreviation
Ratnā.
RayPa.
RayPa.
RaySā. RaySeKa.
RIPāSam.
RitNeCa.
RitSamu.
Rsa DeSta. RşaPañ.
R$a VISta.
R$iSta. Rukmi Ha.
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor etc. Mode of Reference Ratnávali, Śrībarşa, POBH. C. R. Devadbar, N. G. Suru, Page. Line
Poona, 1954. Rayanaprikkba, Thakkura Pheru, Vivek Publications, S. R. Verse No.
Sbarma, Aligarh, 1984. Rāyapasenijja, Uvangasuttāni-4 (Part I), pp. 81-212, JVB. Sūtra No.
Yuvacharya Mahaprajna. Ladnun, Rajasthan, 1987. Rayaņasāra, Kundakunda, Balbbadra Jain, Jaipur, 1979. Verse No. Rayana sebarīkaba, Jinaharsaganl, Caturavijaya, JAGRM. 63, Page. Line (Verse No.)
Bombay, 1917. Risaba paranasamdhi, Ratnaprabba, Samdhikavyasamuccaya, Kadavaka. Line
pp. 1-8, R. M. Shah, LDS. 72, Ahmedabad, 1980. Rittbaņemicariu, Svayambhū, JMGM. 19, D. C. Jain, Sagga. Kadavaka, Lino
Varanasi, 1985. Rittbasamuccaya, Durgadevācārya, BSS. 21, BVB. A. S. Sloka No.
Gopaal, Bombay, 1985. Rşabhadevājñāstava, Jinaprabba, JSS. Vol. I, p. 227.
Verse No. Rşabhapañcāśikā, Dhanapāla, DLJP. 83, Hiralal Kapadiya, Sloka No.
Bombay, 1933. Rşabhavirastava, śānticandra, Schubring, Kleine Schriften Verso No.
p. 287, Germany. Rşimandalastava, Dharmaghosasuri, JSS. Vol. I, pp. 273-339. Verse No. Rukmiņiharana, Vatsarāja, Rūpakasatka, pp. 37-74, GOS, Pago. Line (Vorso No.)
8, C, D. Dalal, Baroda, 1918. Sasvatacaityastava, Devendrasuri, JSS. 1, Vol. I, pp. 99-105. Verse No. Sävayadhammadobā, Devasena, ACDJGM. 2, Hiralal Jain, Verse No.
Karanja, 1932. Srāvakadharmavidhiprakarana, Haribhadra, AJGM. 77. Verso No.
Caturavijaya, Bhavnagar, 1924. Sadasī7, Devendra, Karmagrantha 4, Caturavijaya, AGRM, Verse No.
85, Bhavnagar, 1934. Sadharmikavätsalyakulaka, Abhayadeva, Prakaranasamdoba, Verso No.
p. 15, AS. Ratlam, 1929. Sāhityadarpana, Visvanātba, NSP. 1922. with the Vivști of Page. Line
Rāmacarana Tarkavāgisa Bhattācārya, Durgaprasad
Dvivedi. Sahityamīmāmsā, Mabākavi Mankhaka, SBGM. 119, Gauri- Page, Line (Verse No.)
nath Shastri, Varanasi, 1984. Abhijñānasakuntala, Kalidasa, Carl Cappeller, Leipzig, 1909. Page. Line Sälibbaddasamdhi, Ratnaprabba, Saṁdbikävya samuccaya, Kadavaka. Line
pp. 28-36, LDS. 72, R. M. Shah, Ahmedabad, 1980. Sāmācāriprakaraņa, Anonymous, AS, Mebesana, 1919. Folio, Sido. Line Subodbāsāmācārī, Śrīcendra, LDJP. 62, Bombay, 1924. Folio. Side, Line Sāmācārl, Tilakācārya, DLJP. Bhavnagar, VS. 1990. Folio. Side. Line
SaCaiSta. SaDaDo,
SĀDha Vi.
Saasi. D.)
SādVātKu.
SähịDa.
SabiMi.
Sāk.
SāliSam.
Sāmācā Pra. Sāmācā.(S17 ) Sāmācā.( Til.)
P. D. III

Page #53

XVIII
Abbreriation
Samaraka.
Samav.
SambPanca.
SambSit.
SamghKu.
SamkaSu.
SamoTbs. SamSa.
SamSat.(H.)
Samth.
Nume of the Book, Author, Edition, Editur etc. Mode of Reference Samaräiccakabā, Haribhadra, Bibliotheca Indica, Vol. 169, Page. Line
Hermann Jacobi, Calcutta, 1926. Samavāya : 1] Angasuttāņi-I, pp. 825-954, Muni Nathamal, JVB. Samavāya. Sutra No.
Ladnun, VS. 2031. 2] JĀS. 3, pp. 323-480, Muni Jambūvijaya, MJV. Samvāya No.
Bombay, 1985. Sambohapañcāsiyā, Raidbu, (?) B. C. Jain, (Bhaskar), Jaipur, Gātha No.
1985. Sambodhasittari, Ratpasekhara, SVJGM, 10, pp. 6-21, Verse No.
Ahmedabad, 1927. Samghasvarūpakulaka, Haribhadra, Prakaranasaṁdoba, p. 14, Verse No.
ĀS. Ratlam, 1929, Sankalpasuryodaya, Srīveňkatanātha, ALS. 65, Pt. Krisna- Act. Verse. Lino
macarya, Madras, 1948. Samosaranatthaya, Dharmaghosa, Kbadia, Ahmedabad, 1916. Verse No. Samayasara, Kundakunda, RJSM. Manoharlal Siddhant Verse No.
Shastri, Bombay, 1919. Sammattasattari, Haribhadra, DLJP. 35, Lalitavijaya, Verse No.
Bombay, 1916. Samthärā, JAS. 17 (Part I), pp. 280-291, MJV., Muni Verse No.
Punyavijaya, Bhojak, 1984. Samudramanthana, Vatsarāja, Rūpakasatka, pp. 149-191, Page. Line (Verse No.)
GOS. 8, C. D. Dalal, Baroda, 1918. Sanatkumāra-cakravarti-kathānaka, Haribhadra, Appendix, Verse No.
pp. 33-160 to SanKuCa. LDS. 42, H. C Bhayani,
M. C. Modi, Ahmedabad, 1974. Sandesarāsaka, Abdul Rahemāna, SJGM. 22. Jipavijaya Muni, Prakrama. Verse No.
Bombay, 1945. Sandehadolávali, Jinadattasūri, Comm. Srijayasagar UpA- Verse No.
dhyaya, Jamnagar, 1912. Sañjamamañjarl of Mahesvarasūri, P. D. Gune, Introduction Verse No.
to Bhavisayattakabā, pp. 37-39. GOS. 20, Baroda, 1923. Sanamkumāracariu :
Raddā No. Lino 1) Haribhadra, H. Jacobi, München, 1921.
2] Sanatkumāracariya, Haribhadra, H. C. Bbayani, - M. C. Modi, LDS. 42, Ahmedabad. 1974. Sanmatitarka, Siddhasena Divakara, Pt. Dalsukh Malvaniya, Chapter. Vorse No.
Bombay, 1939. Santinabacariya, Jinavallabha, Prakaranasam doba, p. 6, AS. Verse No.
Ratlam, 1929. Santināthadvadasabhavastotra, Dharmaghosa, JSS. Vol. I, Vorso No. p. 107.
Verse No, Santikarastava, Munisundara, JSS. Vol. I, p. 319.
Samudra Ma.
Sapatku Ke.
Sande Rä.
SanDola.
SanMan.
SaņKuCa.
SanmTa.
Santica.
Säntin Dvä BhaSto.
SantiStæ,

Page #54

Xix
Abbreviation
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor etc.
Mode of Reference
Sara Kantha. Sārā Pa.
Sar TiKu.
Sarva JiCaDuḥSto.
Sarvaša.
Sat.(C.)
SațĀg.
SatCu.
SațPra. SatLaka.
Sattbisa.
SavPan.
Sarasvatikanțbābbarana, Bhoja, KM. 94, Bombay, 1934. Page, Line Sārāvalī Paippaya, JĀS. 17 (part I ), pp. 350-360, Muni Verse No.
Punyavījaya, A. M. Bhojak, MJV. Bombay, 1984. Sarvatīrthamabarşikulaka, Jinesvara, Prakaranasamdoha, pp. Verse No.
17-19, ĀS. Ratlam, 1929. Sarvajina-caturvidha-duhsamā-samgraha-stotra, Anonymous, Verse No.
JSS. Vol. I, p. 373. Sarvajñaśataka, Dharmasāgaragani, AUGM. I, Kbeda, Vs. Verse No.
2012. Sattarī, Candramahattara, 6th Karmagrantha, JSM. 37, Verse No.
pp. 157-380, Mudi Jivavijaya, Mehsana, Vs 1988. Satkhandāgama, Puspadapta, Bhūtabali, Sumatibai Shaha, Khanda. Parūvaņā. Sholapur, 1965.
Anugama. Sutra Comm. Dhavala
Vol. Pago. Lino Satakacūrni-vyākhyā, Sivasarman, Siddhasāgaraji Mabaraja, Gatba No.
Jaipur, 1974. Sat-Sthapa-Prakarana, Jineśvara, JSPF. 34, Surat, 1933. Prakarana. Vorse No. Satruõjayalaghukalpa, Prakaranaratna, pp. 1-4, Ahmedabad, Verse No.
VS. 1988. Satthisaya, Nemicandra Bhandari, PGGM. B. J. Sandesara, Verse No.
Baroda, 1953. Sävayapannatti, Umäsväti, Haribhadra's comm. NSP. Verse No.
Keshavalal Premchandra, Bombay, VS. 1961. Sayaya, Devendra, 5th Karmagrantha, Muni Jiva vijaya, Veree No.
Mehsana, VS. 1988. Prākstacandrikā, BVP, Prabhakar Jha, Varanasi, 1969. Prakāja. Karika Setubandha :
Agvāsaka. Verso No. 1) Setubandba ( = Rāvanavaha ), Pravarasena. NSP.
Bombay, 1935. 2) Rāvanavaha, Pravarasena, R. Basak, CSCRS. 8,
Calcutta, 1959. Siddhabhatti, Kundakunda, Jinendra-guna-gaṁstuti va bhakti, Verse No.
pp. 27-31, B. G. Kbot, Kolhapur, 1959. Siddhapähuda, Anonymous (Cirantanācārya ), AGRM. 65, Verse No.
Bhavnagar, 1921. Siddhapañcâsikā, Devendra, AGRM. 16, Bhavnagar, Vs. Verse No.
1969. Sigghamavabaraustava, Saptasmaranastava, pp. 44-45, JSPF. Verse No.
46, Surat, 1942, Silovaosamälā, Jayakirtl, LDS. 77, H. C. Bhayani, R. M. Varse No.
Shah, Ahmedabad, 1980. Sīlapābuda, Kundakunda, MDJGM. 17, pp. 385-392, Vorso No.
Pannalal Soni, Bombay, VS. 1977.
Sayaya.( D.)
SeșKr.( Gr.) SotuBa.
SidBha.( I. II.)
SidPā.
SidPan.
Siggham.
SiloMā.
STIPA.

Page #55

Abbrexiation
Silsam.
Simba.(Gr. )
SimJiSta. Sin Man. SiSiVaka.
SiVaCa.
SiVijCanCa.
ŚräĀ.(V.)
Sra Dha ViPra.
SrädPraSu:
Srikav.
SruñaNa. StaPāJ.Sta.
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor elc. Mode of Reference Silasardhi, Samdhikavyasamuccaya, pp. 96-98, LDS. 72, Verse No.
R. M. Shah, Ahmedabad, 1980. Prākstarūpāvatāra, Simbarāja, RAS., E. Hultzsch, England, Vibbāga. Sūtra
1909. Sīmandharajinastavana, Merupandapa, JSS. Vol. I, p. 340. Verse No. Sțngäramañjarī, Visvesvara, A. N. Upadhye, Satara, 1969. Act. Vorso. Line Sirisirivälakabā, Ratpasekharasūri, Yashendu Prakashana, Verso No.
11, Muni Bhanuchandravijaya, Ahmedabad, 1963. Sirivālacariu, Narasenadeva, JMJGM. 12, Devendrakumar Saidni, Kadavaka. Line
Jain, Delhi, 1974 Sirivijayacanda kevalīcariya, Candraprabba, JDPS. Bhavnagar, Folio, Page. Line
VS. 1962. (Vasunandi) Srāvakācāra, Vasunandi, JMJGM. Hiralal Jain, Verse No.
Kashi, 1952. Srävakadbarmavidbi prakarana, Haribhadra, AGRM, 77, Verse No.
Caturavijaya, Bhavnagar, 1924. Sraddhapratikramaņasūtra, with Ratnasekhar's comm., DLJP. Verse No.
46, Surat, 1919. Śrīcihnakāvya, Bilvamangala, TSS. 235, K. Raghavan Pillai, Sarga. Sloka No.
Trivandrum, 1971. Śrutajñānapamaskāra, Anonymous, JSS. Vol. I, p. 87. Verse No. Stambhanapārsvajinastavana (Purnakalasa ), JSS. Vol. II, Verse No.
p. 50. Subbadrā, Hastimalla, MDJGM. 43, M. V. Patwardban, Act. Verso. Line
Bombay, 1950. Subhadrādbapañjaya, Kulasekharavarman, TSS, 1. Ganapathi Act. Verso. Line
Sastrī, N. P. Unni, Delhi, 1987. Subhāsiyagabāsamgaha, Jinesvarasuri, LDS. 52, A. M. Verse No.
Bhojak, N. J. Shaba, in Gähārayanakosa, pp. 67-75,
Abmedabad, 1975. Subhāsiya pajjasamgaba, Jipeśvarasüri, LDS. 52, A. M. Verse No.
Bhojak, N. J. Shaba, in Gäbārayaņa kosa, pp. 76-82,
Abmedabad, 1975. Sudamsanacariu, Nayanandī, RIPJA. 3, Hiralal Jain, Vaisball, Saṁdhi. Kadavaka. Line
1970. Sugandha dasamskabā, Udayacandra, JMJGM. 6, Hiralal Samdbi. Kadavaka. Lina
Jain, Varanasi, 1966. Sumipasattari, Haribhadra, Prakaranasandoh3, p. 12, AS. Verse No.
Ratlam, 1929. Supāsapābacariya, Laksmanagani, JVSSM. 4, 8, 12, Har- Story. Section. Verse No,
govindadas Sheth, Benaras, 1919. Sürapannatti, Uvangasuttāņi-4 (Part II ), pp. 594-712, JVB. Pabuda. Sutra. Verse
Yuvacharya Mabaprajna, Ladnun, 1989.
Subha.
Subha Dha.
SubbaGaSam.
Subhā PajjSam
SudCa.(N.)
Sug Daska.
SumiSat.
SupāsCa.
SiraP.

Page #56

Abbreviation
SurSuCa.
SusCa.
Sut Pä.
Suy.
SuyBha
SuyCu.
SayNi.
Svapna Vä.
SvayChan.
Tam Tho.
Tand.
TapaSamva.
Tāpa Va.
Tārā.
TarLo.
TarVaKa.(Bba.)
TattvärSu.
TattvaTar. TavSam.
Thaoa
XXI
Mode of Keference
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor etc. Surasundaricariya, Dhanešvara, JVSSM. 1, Hargovindadas Pariccheda. Verse No. Sheth, Banaras, 1916.
Susaḍhacariya, Anonymous, JAGRM. Bhavnagar, 1918. Suttapahuda, Kundakunda, Pannalal Jain, Rajsthan, 1968.
Suyagada:
1] P. L. Vaidya, Poona, 1928.
Sūtra No.
2] Angsuttapi-1, pp. 251-486, JVB. Muni Nathmal, Śrutas kandha. Adhyāya. Ladnun, VS. 2031. Uddeśaka. Sūtra
3) JAS. Muni Jambūvijaya, MJV. Bombay, 1978. Suyabhatti, Kunda kunda, Jinendra-guna-samstuti va bhakti, Verse No. B. G. Khot, Kolhapur, 1959.
Sūyagaḍacunni, Paiņatherabhadanta, PrTS. 19, Muni Punya- Page. Line vijaya, Ahmedabad, 1975.
Sayagadanijjutti, Bhadrababu, PrTS. 19, Muni Punyavijaya, Page. Line
Ahmedabad, 1975.
Svapnavasavadattam, Bhata, Bhāsanāṭakacakra, pp. 1-50, Act. Verse, Line POS. 54, C. R. Devadhar, Poona, 1937.
Svayambhuchandas, Svayambhu, RPGM. 37, H. D. Velankar, Pu. Chapter. Verse No. Jodhpur, 1962. U. Chapter. Verse No.
Verse No.
Verse No.
Tamjayathotta, Saptasmaraṇastava, pp. 29-36, JSPF. 46, Verse No.
Surat, 1942.
2] Tandulaveyaliya, with the comm. of Jayavimalagani,
DLJP. 59, NSP. Bombay, 1922.
1] Tandulaveyaliya, JĀS. 17 (Part I), pp. 35-65, Sūtra No. (with Verse) MJV. Punyavijaya, Bhojak, Bombay, 1984.
Tarangalola
Tapatisamvarana, Kulasekharavarman, TSS. I, Ganapathi Act. Verse. Line Šāstrī, N. P. Unni, Delhi, 1987.
Tāpasavatsaraja, Śrīmātrarāja alias Anangaharsa, Yadagiri Act, Verse, Line Yathiraj Sampthkumar Ramanuj Muni, Mysore, 1928.
(Samkṣipta-tarangavati-katbā),
LDS. 75, H. C. Bhayani, Ahmedabad, 1979.
Tārāyaṇa, Bappabhatti, PrTS. 24, H. C. Bhayani, Verse No. Ahmedabad, 1987.
Anonymous Verse No.
Tarangavalkabi, Bhadresvara, TarLO, LDS. 75, pp. 231-258, Verse No. H. C. Bhayani, Ahmedabad, 1979.
Tattvatarangini, Dharmasagara, AS. Ratlam, 1921.
Tavasamdbl, Samdhikavyasamuccaya, pp. 105-109, Visalarajasurlisya, LDS. 72, R. M. Shah, Ahmedabad, 1980,
Tattvärthasūtra, Tattvärthādhigamasutra, Umāsvāti, with Adhyaya. Sutra comm. of Siddhasenagani, DLJP. 67, Hiralal Jain, Bombay, 1926.
Thana:
11 JAS. 3, MJV. pp. 1-322, Jambūvijaya, Bombay. 2] Angasuttani-1, pp. 487-824, JVB. Muni Nathmal, Ladnun, VS. 2031.
Verse No.
Kadavaka. Line
Stbana. Uddegaka. Sūtra

Page #57

XXII
Abbreviation
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor etc.
Mode of Reference
TiloPay.
Tilosa.
Tittho.
TripuDi.
Trivi.(Gr.)
UIKam Tha.
Unma Rā.(Bbā.)
Unma Rā. Vi.)
UruBh.
Usaņi.
Ussu Ku.
Utt.
Tiioyapannatti, Yativrşabhācārya, JJGM. 1, A. N. Upadhye, Mabādbīkāra. Verse No.
Hiralal Jain, Sholapur, 1943. Tiloyasāra, Nemicandra, Shivsagar Granthmala 6, Ratanchand Verse No. (Adhikāra No.)
Jain Mukhtar, Chetanprakash Patni, Rajsthan, 1974. Titthogālī, JĀS. 17 (Part I), pp. 408-523, MJV. Punya- Verse No.
vijaya, Bhojak, Bombay, 1984. Tripuradabadima, Vatsarāja, Rūpakasatka, pp. 75-117, Page. Line (Verse No.)
GOS. 8, C. D. Dalal, Baroda, 1918. Prākstavyākarana, Trivikrama, JJGM. 4, P. L. Vaidya, Adhyāya. Päda. Sutra
Sholapur, 1954. Ulläsikkamatthava, Saptasmaranastava, pp. 14-21, JSPF. 46, Verse No.
Surat, 1942. Unmattarāghava, Bbāskarabhatta, KM. 17, Pt. Durgaprasad, Page. Line
K. P. Parab, Bombay, 1926. Uomattarāgbava, Virūpākşa, ALS, 57, V. Krishnamacharya, Page. Line
Madras, 1946. Urubhanga, Bhāsa, Bhāsapāțakacakra, pp. 489-510, POS. Page. Verse No. 54, C. R. Devadbar, Poona, 1937.
Page. Line Usaniruddha, Rāmapāņivāda, ALS. 42, S. S. Shastri, Kunhan Sarga. Verse No.
Raja, Madras, 1943. Ussutta kulaya, Dharmasāgara, Iryāpathikīşaţtrimsikā, pp. Verse No.
38-49, AS. 49, Bombay, 1927. Uttarajjhayana :
Chapter. Verse No. 1] Jarl Charpentier, Archives D'Etudes Orientals, Vol.
18, Uppsala, 1922. 2) Uttarādhyayanāni, with Nemicandra's comm.
Sukhabodhā, AVGM. 12, Valad, 1937. 31 Uttarādhyayana with Niryukti and Tika Sisyahita
by Santisuri, DLJP. 33, 36, 41. Uttararāmacarita, Bhavabhūti, S. K. Belvalkar, Poona, 1921. Act. Verso. Lipo Uttarajjbayanacuņņi, Jinadāsagani, AS. Surat, 1933. Folio. Side. Lino Uttarajjbayananijjutti, as in Sişyabit of Säntyäcārya Folio. Side. Line Uvāsagadasão :
Sutra No. 1] P. L. Vaidya, Poona, 1930. 2] Angasuttāņi-3, pp. 395-537. JVB. Mugi Nathamal,
Ladoun, Vs. 2031. Uvahānasamdhi, Anonymous, Samdbikāvyasamuccaya, Kadavaka. Line
pp. 99-100, LDS. 72, Ahmedabad, 1980. Uvaesagattari, Ksemarāja, JDPS. Bhavnagar, 1917.
Verse No. Uvasaggabaratthuya, Saptasmaranastava, pp. 46-51, JSPP. Verse No.
46, Surat, 1942 Uvavaiya :
Sūtra No. 1) Das Aupapātika Sūtra, E. Loumann, Leipzig,
1883.
Utta Rāca, UttCu. UttNi.
Uvās.
UvaSam.
UvaSat. UvasHa Thu.
Uvay.

Page #58

XXIII
Abbreviation
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor etc.
Mode of Reference
Uva Vlhi Tho.
UvMä.
UvMaKu. UvPay. UvPayTi. UvRako.
UvRas.
UvSam.
VaddhaCa.
Vaddba Des.
Vägbhatā.
2) Uvavāiya, N. G. Suru, Poona, 1931. 3] Uvařgasuttāni-4, pp. 1-77, JVB. Yuvacharya
Mahaprajna, Ladoun, 1987. Uva hānavihithotta, Māpadeva, Namaskārasvādhyāya, pp. Verse No.
93-101, JSVM. N. A. Shah, Bombay, 1961. Uvaesamālā, Dharmadāsa, with Ratnaprabha's comm. Verse No. (Pago. Line)
Dogbatti, AHJGM. 5, Hemsagarsuri, 1958. Uvaesamanimālā kulaya, Jinesvara, MSS. 826(1) 1892-95. Folio. Side. Line Uvaesapaya, Haribhadra, MKJMM. 19, Baroda, 1923. Verse No. Uvaespayațīkā, Candrarsi, MKJMM. 19, Baroda, 1923. Folio. Side. Line Uvaesarayaņakosa, Padmajinesvarasuri, SVJGM. 10, pp. 3-21, Verse No.
Abmedabad, 1927. Uvaesarasāyanu. Jinadatta, Apabhramsakävyatrayi, pp. 29-66, Verso No.
L. B. Gandhi, GOS. 37, Baroda, 1927. Uvaesasamdhi, Hemasära, Samdhikavyasamuccayepp. 118- Kadavaka. Lido
120, LDS. 72, R. M. Shah, Ahmedabad, 1980. Vaddbamā acariu, Vibudha Sridhara, JMJGM. 14, Rajaram Samdhi. Kadavaka. Line
Jain, Varanasi, 1975. Vaddhamāṇadesaņā, Subbavardhanagani, JDPS. Bhavnagar, Ullása. Verse No.
Vs. 1984. Vägbbatālankāra, Vägbhața, VSGM. 33, Satyavrat Simba, Pariccheda. Sloka
1957. Vairotyādevistava, Arya Apardila, JSS. Vol. I, p. 347. Verse No. Vajjālagga, Jayavallabba, PrTS. 14, M. V. Patwardhan, Gatha No.
Ahmedabad, 1969. Vakroktijivita, Kuntaka, COS. 8, with author's own comm., Page. Line.
S. K. De, 1928 Prakrtaprakäia, Vararuci, E. B. Cowell, Calcutta, 1962. Pariccheda. Sutra Vasudevahindi, Dharmadāsagaņi, Samghadāsagani, ĀJGRM. Page, Line
80, Pupyavijaya, Caturavijaya, Bhavnagar, 1930. Vasudevahindl ( Madhyamakāņda ), Dharmadāsagani, Samgha- Page. Lino
dāsagani, LDS. 99, H. C. Bhayani, R. M. Shah,
Ahmedabad, 1987. Vatthusāra, Thakkura Pheru, R. P. Kulkarni, Jnana Prabo- Chapter. Verse No.
dhini, Poona, 1987. Vavahārasutta : 1) JSSS. W. Schubring, Poona, 1923.
Sūtra No. 2 J Navasuttāni-5, JVB. pp. 599-661, Yuvacharya Uddeśa. Sutra
Mabaprajna, Ladoun, 1987. 3] Vavahära in Drel Chedasūtrag des Jaina Kanong,
W. Schubring, Colette Caillat, Hamburg, 1966. Vavahārabhāsa, Bhāşya and Vịtti by Malayagiri, Muni Uddeba. Verse No.
Manek, Bombay, 1928.
VairotSta. Vajlag.
Vakroji.
Vara. Gr. ) VasuHi.
Vasu HI.(M.)
Vatthusa.
Vave.
Vaya Bhā.

Page #59

XXIV
Abbreviation
Vaya Ka.
Ven Sam.
ViAvBhā.
Viddaśa. VidMa.
Vikramo.
Vilāka.
Vimā Pra. ViPaSam.
ViSapBbaSto.
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor etc. Mode of Reference Vaya kabā, Brahma Sädbāraṇa, Bhagchandra Jain, Jaipur, Kathā. Section No. Lino
1985. VeņIsambāra, Bhattanārāyana, A. B. Gajendragadkar, Bombay, Act. Verso, Lino
1922. Visesăvassayabbāsa, Jinabhadra :
Verse No. 1] LDS. 10, Pt. Malvaniya, Ahmedabad, 1966. 2] YJGM. 25, 27, 28, 31, 33, 35, 37, 39. Hargovindadas
Sherb, Benares, Vīra Samvat 2441. Viddhajalabhanjikā, Rajasekhara, cos. 30, Calcutta, 1943. Act. Page. Lino Vidagdhamädbava, Rūpagoswāmi, KM. 81, Bhavadatta Act. Verse. Line
Shastri, K. P. Parab, Bombay, 1937. Vikramorvasiya, Kalidasa, BSS. 16, S. P. Pandit, Bombay, Act. Verse. Section
1901. Vilasavaīka bā, sādhārana, LDS. 61, R. M. Shah, Ahmedabad. Samdhi, Kadavaka. Line
1977. Vidhimärgaprapā, Jinaprabhasūri, 43, Jinavijaya, Surat, 1941. Page. Lino Virajiņapäranayasamdhi, Ratnaprabba, Samdbikavyasamu- Kadavaka. Lino
ccaya, pp. 1-19, LDS. 72, R. M. Shah, Ahmedabad.
1980. Vira-sapta-vimsati-bhava-stotra, Dbarmaghosa, JSS. Vol. I, Vorse No.
p. 111. Visosaņavati, Jinabhadra, Ratlam, 1927.
Page. Line Virastava, Dhanapala, JSS. Vol. I, p. 91.
Verse No. Vimsativimsikā, Haribbadra, K. V. Abhyankar, Poona, 1932. Vimsikā. Sloka Viratthaya, JĀS. 17 (Part I), pp. 292-297, MJV. Punya- Verse No.
vijaya, Bhojak, Bombay, 1984. Vividhatirthakalpa, Jinaprabha, SJGM, 10, Shantiniketan, Page. Line ( Kalpa No.)
Bengal, 1934. Vividhatīrthastutayaḥ, Anonymous, JSS. Vol. I. p. 375. Verse No. Vivāgasūya : 1] P. L. Vaidya, Poona, 1933.
Sūtra No. 2] Angasuttāņi-3, JVB, pp. 717-809, Muni Nathmal, Adhyayana. Section
Ladoun, VS, 2031. Vivegamañjari, Asadha, JVÁSM. Benares.
Verse No. Viyā hapannatti or Bhagavati :
Sataka. Uddeśa. Sutra 1) JÁS. 4, Bechardas Doshi, Bombay, 1974. 2) Angasuttāņi-2, JVB. Muni Nathamal, Ladoun, Vs.
2031. Viyarapannāsi, Vijayavimala, AGRM. 18, Bhavnagar, VS. Pago. Lide
1969. Viyārasāra, Pradyumna, AS. Mehsana, 1923.
Verse No.
Vibesa.
VISta.( Dha.) Vis Vīs.
VITha.
VITIKA.
ViTirStu.
Vivā.
VivMañ. Viy.
Viy Pan.
ViySa.

Page #60

XXV
Abbreviation
ViySat.
VptJaSa.
VyaktiVi.
Vyavku.
YayaCa.
Name of the Book, Author, Edition, Editor etc. Mode of Reference Viyārasattari, Mahendrasūri, AGRM. 18, Bhavnagar, vs. Verse No.
1969. Vịttajātisamuccaya, Virahānka, RPGM. 61, H. D. Velankar, Niyama. Verse No.
Jodhpur, 1962. Vyaktiviveka, Mahimabbatta, TSS. 5, T. Ganapati Sastrī, Page. Line
1909. Vyavasthākulaka, Prakaranasamdoba, pp. 11-15, AS. Ratlam, Vorge No.
1929. Yayāticarita, Rudradeva, C. R. Devadhar, BORI. 6, Poona, Act. Verse. Lino
1965. Yogabataka, Haribhadra, LDS. 4, Muni Punyavijaya, Verse No.
Abmedabad, 1965. Yogasära, Yogīndudeva, RJSM, 10, A. N. Upadhye, Bombay, Verse No.
1937. Srīyugapradbānacatuspadikā, Thakkura Pheru, JSPF. 53, Verse No.
Included in Carcaryādi-grantha-samgraba, Surat, VS.
2004. Yugă dide vastava, Subhasundaragani, JSS. Vol. I, p. 353. Verse No
Yogša.
Yog Sa
YugCatus.
Yug DoSta.
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE BIBLIOGRAPHY
AAP. ACDJGM. AGRM. AHJGM AJGRM. ALS. AS. ASRM. AUGM, AVGM. BJMGM. BJP. BLII. BORI. BSPS. BSS. BVB.
BVG. P.D.IV
Agama Anuyoga Prakashan, Sanderav, Rajasthan. Ambadas Chavre Digambar Jain Granthmala, Karanja. Atmananda Granthratnamala, Bhavnagar. Ananda Hema Jain Granthmala. Atmananda Jain Granthratnamala, Bhavnagar. Adyar Library Series, Madras. Agamoday Samiti, Ratlam. Agama Sabitya Ratnamala, Delhi. Agama Uddharak Granthmala, Kheda. Atmavira Granthmala, Bhavnagar. Bhartiya Jpanpith Murtidevi Granthmala, Varanasi Bhartiya Jnanpith, Varanasi, New Delhi. Bhogilal Leherchand Institute of Indology, Delhi. Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, Poona. Bombay Sanskrit and Prakrit Series, Bombay. Bombay Sanskrit Series, Bombay. Bhartiya Vidyabhavan, Bombay. Bhartiya Vidya Prakashan Granthavall, Bombay,

Page #61

XXVI
CABP. COS. CSCRS. CSGM. DBGM. DDJGM DLJP. GHDJGM. GOS. HeGr. HFL. HGRK. HOS. JAGRM. JAPM. JĀS. JDPS. JGRK, JJGM. JMJGM. JSM. JSPF. JSS. JSSGM. JSSS. JSUF. JSVM.
Chaukbamba Amarabharati Prakasban, Varanasi. Calcutta Oriental Series, Calcutta. Calcutta Sanskrit College Research Series, Calcutta Chaukhamba Surabharati Grantbmala, Varanasi. Dakshina Bharati Grantbmala. Devendrakirti Digambar Jain Granthmala, Karanja, Devchand Lalbhai Jain Pustakoddhar, Surat. Gandhi Haribhai Devakaran Jain Granthmala, Calcutta. Gaikwad Oriental Series, Baroda. Hemchandracharya Granthavali, Ahmedabad, Hamsa vijay Free Library, Ahmedabad Hindi Granth Ratpakar Karyalay, Bombay. Harvard Oriental Series, Cambridge, Massachusetts. Jain Atmananda Granthratnamala, Bhavnagar. Jainagam Prakash Mandal, Agra. Jain Agam Series, Bombay. Jain Dharm Prasarak Sabba Surat, Bhavnagar. Jain Granth Ratnakar Karyalay, Bombay. Jivraj Jain Granthmala, Sholapur. Jnanpith Murtidevi Jaip Granthmala, Varanasi. Jain Shreyaskar Mandal, Mehesana. Jindattasuri Prachin Pustakoddhar Fund, Bombay. Jaipastotrasamdoha Vol. I, II. Jain Sahitya Samshodhak Granthmala, Ahmedabad. Jain Sabitya Samsbodhak Samiti, Poona. Jain Sahitya Uddbarak Fund, Ahmedabad. Jain Sahitya Vikas Mandal, Bombay. Jain Visva Bharati, Ladnun. Jain Vividh Sahitya Shastramala, Varanasi. Kundakunda kahan Jain Shastramala, Songarb. Kavyamala, Nirnaysagar Press, Bombay. Kashi Sanskrit Granthmala Varanasi. Lalbhai Dalpatbhai Series, Abmedabad. Motilal Banarasidass, Banaras, Delbi. Manikchandra Digambar Jain Granthmala, Bombay. Mahavir Jain Vidyalaya, Bombay. Muktikamal Jain Mohanmala, Baroda. Madras University Sanskrit Series, Madras. Nirnaysagar Press, Bombay. Oriental Research Institute Publications, Sanskrit Serios, Mysoro. Oxford University Press, London. Prachin Gurjar Granthmala, Baroda. Prachin Jain Sahityoddbar Granthavali, Ahmedabad. Poona Oriental Book House, Poona. Poona Oriental Series, Poona. Prakrit Text Society, Varanasi. Royal Asiatic Society, Great Britain. Research Institute of Prakrit, Jainology and Abimsa, Valsball, Rajchandra Jain Shastramala, Agas, Gujrat.
JVB. JVSSM.
KKJSM КМ. KSGM LDS. MB. MDJGM. MJV. MKJMM. MUSS. NSP. ORIPSS. OUP. PGGM. PJSG, POBH. POS, Prts.
RAS.
RIPJA. RJSM.

Page #62

XXVII
RKS. RPGM SA. SanJGM. SĀVG. SBJ.
DJJJS. SDJS. SJGM. SPPP. SVJGM. TSS. VBSGM. VSGM YJGM. YJSP.
Rishabhadevaji Kesarimalji Samstha, Ratlam. Rajasthan Puratan Granthmala, Jodhpur. Sahitya Akademi, New Delhi. Sanatan Jain Granthmala, Calcutta. Shri Atmavallabh Granth, Valad. The Secred Books of the Jalnas, Arrab. Shantisagar Digambar Jain Jinvani Jirnoddbarak Samstha, Phaltan. Shantivir Digambar Jain Samsthan, Mabavirji, Rajasthan. Singhi Jain Granthmala, Bombay. Satya Prakash Printing Press, Ahmedabad. Satyavijay Jain Granthmala, Bhavnagar. Trivandrum Sanskrit Series, Trivandrum. Vidya Bhavan Sanskrit Granthmala, Varanasi. Vidyasagar Sanskrit Grantbmala, Varanasi. Yashovijay Jain Grantbmala, Varanasi. Yashovijay Jain Sanskrit Pathshala, Mehsana.
LANGUAGE AND SUBJECTWISE CLASSIFICATION
WITH APPROXIMATE CHRONOLOGY OF THE WORKS
I. ARDHAMĀGADHI CANON (AMg.) 1. Angas 2. Upāngas 3. Prakirņakas (Painnas ) 4. Late Prakirņakas (in JM.) 5. Epistemological Works 6. Mülasutras 7. Chedasutras
II. JAIN MAHĀRAŞTRI (JM) 8. Nlijattis 9. Bhāşyas 10. Cūrņi 11. Karmagranthas 12. Caritras 13. Kathās 14. Prakaranas 15. Kulakas 16. Stotras
17. Didactical Works 18. Philosophical and Ritualistic Works 19. Scientific and Technical Works 20. Anthologies III. JAIN SAURASENI (J$.) 21. Pro-Canon and Later Works 22. Religious and Philosophical Works IV. MAHĀRĀŞTRI (M.) 23. Maharastri Works 24. Poetics (Verses quoted) V. DRAMATIC PRAKRITS 25. Dramas 26. Sattakas (in Prakrit) VI. APABHRAMA (Apa.)
27. Apabbramsa Works VII. MISCELLANEOUS
28. Prakrit Grammars (in Sanskrit) 29. Metrics (Prakrit, Sanskrit)

Page #63

XXVIII
ARDHAMĀGADHI CANON (AMg.) Angas Ayāra Suyagada Thapa Samavāya Viyabapapaatti Nāyādhammakabão Uvāsagadasão Antagadadasão Aņuttarovavāiyadasão Paṇhāvāgaraņāi Vivāgasuya Upāngas Uvavaiya Rāyapasepaijja Jīvābhigama Pappavana Jambuddivapannatti Surapannatti Capdapannatti (Nirayāvaliyão ) Kappiyão Kappavadimsiyao Puppbiyão Püppbacūlão Vanbidasão Prakirņakas (Painnas ) Arābaņāpaļāyā - Páīņāyariya Arābagāpadāyā - Virabhadra Arāhanäsāra (Pajjantārābaņā) Aurapaccakkhāņa I, 11 Aurapaccakkbāņa - Virabhadra Bhattaparinda - Virabhadra Candāvejjbaya Causarana (Kusalāņubandhi) - Virabhadra Devindatthaya Gacchāyāra Ganivijā Isibhāsiyāim Joisa karandaga Mabā paccakkhāna Maranavibhatti (Maranasamāhi) Samthāraga Säravali Tandulaveyaliya Tittbogāli Viratthao
4. Late Prakiranakas (in JM.)
Arābanā - Sulasasāvaya Ārābanāpayarana -- Abbayadeva Divasāgarapanpatti Epistemological Works Nandisutta Jogapandi Laghupandi (Apunānandi ) Anuogadaraim Mülasūtras Uttarajjhāyā Dasaveyaliya Avassayasutta Pindanijjutti Ohanijjutti Chedasutras Ayaradasão, ( VIII Pujjusaņākappa-Jinacarlya,
Therāvali, Sämāyāri ) Kappa (Bộbatkalpa ) Vavabära Nisība Mahānisiha Pañcakappa Jitakappa JAIN MAHĀRĀȘTRI (JM.) Nijjuttis on Avassaya Dasaveyaliya Uttarajjhāyā Ayāra Sūyagada Ogbanijjutti Pindanijjutti
Kappanijjutti 9. Bhāsyās ( Often mixed up with the Nijjuttis and
containing verses called Mülabhagya ) Bțhatkalpabbaşya ( Pkt.) Vyavabārabhāsya (Pkt.) Nisīthabhāşya (Pkt.) Vigesāvasyakabbāşya (Pkt.) . Pancakalpabhāşya (MS.) (Pkt.)
Jītakalpabhāşya (Pkt.) 10. Cūrnis
Avaấyakacūrni (Pkt.) Ācārāngacūrņi (Pkt.) Sutrakstāngacūrņi (Pkt. ) Dabavaikālikacūrņi I, II (Pkt.)

Page #64

XXIX
Uttarādhyayanacūrņi (Pkt. ) Nandīsūtracūrņi (Pkt. ) Anuyogadvăracūrņi (Pkt. ) Nisītbacūrņi (Pkt.) Jitakalpacūrại (Pkt.)
11. Karmagranthas
Karmapraksti - Sivašarman ( Pkt.) with Cūrņi
and Vftti of Malayagiri Sataka ( Sayaya ) - Sivaśarman with Curņi Saptatikā (Sattari ) - Candrarsimahattara Särdbagataka - Jinavallabba (Pkt.) Pañcasamgraba - Candramabarşi (Pkt.) with his
own Vịtti (Prācinakarmagranthus ) Karmavipaka ( Pkt. ) Karmastava (Pkt. ) Bandbasvāmitva (Pkt.) Sadasīti (Pkt.) (Navinakarmagranthas) Karmavipaka (Pkt.) Karmastava (Pkt.) Bandhasvāmitva (Pkt.) Sadasīti ( Pkt.)
Sataka (Pkt.) 12. Caritras
Paumacariya Cauppannamahāpurisacariya Surasundarīcariya Munisuvvayacariya Pubavıcandacariya Vijayacandakevalicariya Mabäviracariya Kumärapälacarita (Pkt.) Jambucariya Jugādijinindacariya Manipaticarita (H.) (Pkt.) Supāsanāhacariya Bhuvagabbāņukevalicariya Manipaticarita - Anonymous (Pkt. ) Susadbacariya - Anonymous
Kummāputtacariya 13. Kathās
Vasudevahindi Kuvalayamālākabā Samaräiccakaba Dhuttakkbāņa Kabāņayakosa Kathakosa prakarana (Pkt. ) Akkhānamaņikosa
Manoramākaha Kumāra pālapratibodba (Pkt.) Nammayasundarīkabā Jinadattākkbyāna - Sumati ( Pkt.) Jinadattākkhyāna - Anonymous (Pkt.) Nanapancam kahā Taranga lola Sanamkumaracakravartikatbānaka (Pkt.) Kalakäcàryakatbanaka - Anonymous (Pkt.) Kālakācārya kathanaka - Bhāva. ( Pkt. ) Kälakacaryakathānaka - Dharmaprabba (Pkt. ) Vividhatirtbakalpa (partly Pkt.) Añjapāsupdarī kabanaya Sirisirivala kaha Rayaņasebarīkaba
JM. stories in the Sanskrit and Präkrit commentaries like Cunnis and Țikās on works like Avassaya, Uttarajjbāyā, Dasaveyaliya and others. Cf. Erz.,
AvȚI.(H.) 14. Prakaranas
Fañcāsakaprakarana ( Pkt. ) Sravakadbarmavidbiprakarana ( Pkt. ) Mülasuddhiprakaraṇa ( Pkt. ) Dharmaratnapra karana (Pkt.) Devendranarakendraprakaraņa (Pkt.) Subodhā Sāmācări (Pkt.) Brahmacaryaparikarana ( Pkt.) Dharmavidhiprakarana (Pkt.) Dandakaprakarana ( Pkt. ) Sāmācāri — Tilakācārya (Pkt. ) Sāmācāri - Anonymous (Pkt.) Jivadayaprakarana ( Pkt. ) Nanācitta ka prakarana Pkt. ) Navatattvaprakarana (Pkt.) Gängeyabhangaprakarana Pkt.)
15. Kulakas
Aloyanākulaya Apnäyaunchakulaya Appavisohikulaya Arābanākulaya Dvadasakulaka ( Pkt.) Dvādasangipadapramāṇakulaka (Pkt. ) Iryāpathikimithyāduşkstakulaka (Pkt.) Khantikulaya Micchädukkadakulaya Mitthyātvamanthanakulaka (Pkt. ) Sadharmikavatsalyakulaka (Pkt.) Samghasvarūpakulaka (Pkt. ) Sarvatirthamaharşıkulaka (Pkt. )

Page #65

XXX
Rşabha-devājñā-stava (Pkt.) Rsabba-pañcāsikā (Pkt.) Rşimandala-stava (Pkt.) Samosaranatthaya Santikarastava ( Pkt.) Santinātha-dvādasa-bhava-stotra (Pkt.) Sarva-jina-caturvidba-duḥsama-samgha-stotra
(Pkt.) Sasvata-chaitya-stava (Pkt.) Siddhapancasika ( Pkt.) Sigghamavabarau-stotra (Pkt. ) Sīmandhara-jina-stavana ( Pkt. ) Srutajnana-namaskāra (Pkt) Stambhanapārsvajinastavana ( Pkt.) Tam-Jayau-smarana-stotra (Pkt.) Uvasaggabara-stotra (Pkt. ) Vairotyādevistava ( Pkt.) Vira-saptavimsati-bhava-stotra (Pkt.) Vira-stava Pkt. ) Vividhatīrthastuti ( Pkt.) Yugādidevastava (Pkt.)
Ussuttakulaya
Uvaesamanimālākulaya 16. Stotras ( alphabetically arranged )
Adidevastava - Devendra (Pkt.) Adidevastava - Ramacandra (Pkt.) Adide vastava Sanskrit, Prakrit) Adidātba-trayodaśa-bhava-stotra (Pkt. ) Aiņābacariya Ajitaśāntistava - Dharmagboşa ( Pkt. ) Ajitasantistava – Nandışena (Pkt.) Alpababutvagarbhitamabāvīrastava (Pkt. ) Bhava-trayī-stavana ( Pkt.) Candraprabba-sapta-bhava-stotra (Pkt.) Caturvimsati-jipasta vana (Pkt.) Catustrimsat.jinātisayastavana Pkt.) Duhsamākálastavana (Pkt.) Dväsaptati-jina.stotra (Pkt. ) Ganadbarasärdbaśataka ( Pkt. ) Gautamastotra (Pkt.) Gurupäratantryastotra (Pkt.) Guruvandanabbāşya (Pkt.) Jayatihuyanathuya Jipastotra (Abhāņaka-stotra ) (Pkt.) Jiva-vicāra-stavana ( Pkt. ) Jñānastotra (Pkt. ) Lagbu-ajitaśāntistava (Ulläsikkamastava) (Pkt.) Lokānuka deva-stavada (Pkt.) Mabāvira-kalasa (Apabbramsamaya ) Mabāvīra-stotra (Vīrajipathaya ) ( Pkt. ) Mallijipastavana ( Pkt. ) Mayarahiyathaya Namokkāratthaya Namaskärastavana - Anonymous (Pkt. ) Namiūņa-stotra (Bhayabarathotta ) Nandisvara-dvīpa-stotra (Nandisaraceiyasamthava)
( Pkt.) Neminātba-nava bhava-stotra ( Pkt.) Panca kallyāpaka-stotra (Pkt. ) Pañcaparamettbithavana Panca-trimsat-jipavani-guna-stavana (Pkt.) Pārsvadevastavana - Jayakirti ( Pkt.) Pārsvajinastavana ( Pkt. ) Pārsvanatha-dasa-bhava-stava (Pkt. ) Pārsvanātha-jina-stavana - ( Navagraba varupa
garbhita ) (Pkt. ) Pārsvapātha-jina-stavana - Ratnkirti (Pkt.) Pārsvanātha-lagbu-stava (Navagahathuigabbb3 )
( Pkt. ) Parávanātba-stavana - Dbarmaghosa ( Pkt.) Pārsvanatha-stavana - Jinavallabba (Pkt.) Pārkva-prabhu-stavana ( Pkt.)
17. Didactic Works :
Uvaesamala Uvaesapaya Uvaesapayaţikā Dhammovaesamālā Sīlovaesamālā Vivegamañjari Uvaosagattari Sammattasattari Satthisayaya Uvaesarayanakosa Sambodhasattari Sandeba-dobávall Bhavavairāgyasataka - Anonymous (Pkt. )
Samboba pancāsiya 18. Philosophical and Ritualistic Works
Tattvārthasūtra (Skt.) Sanmatitarka (Sammal-pagaraga ) Visesanavati ( Pkt.) Dbyāpasataka ( Pkt.) Bębatksetrasamāsa (Pkt.) Bțhatsamgrabani (Pkt.) Jambuddivasamgabayan! Lagbusamghayani (Pkt.) Dhammasamgabaội ( Pkt.) Pancavatthuya Sävayapannatti Sumiņasattari Pañcāsakaprakarana ( with Curpl on 1 (Pkt.)

Page #66

XXXI
Vimativimsika (Pkt.) Yogakataka( Pkt.) Jivaviyara Pancasamgraba (Pkt.) Nayapaya Rittbasamuccaya Ceiyavandanabhāsa Ceiyavandanamabābhāsa Nigoyachattīsi Pudgalaşaţtrimgikā (Pkt.) Posabavihi Jivāņusāsana Pavayanasároddbāra Laghuksetrasamāsa (Pkt.) Loganālībattisi Paccakkhānasarūva Sattbisaya Vidbimārgaprapā (Pkt. ) Viyārasāra
Siddhapancasikā (Fkt) 19. Scientific and Technical Works
Argavijā Loka vijaya-yantra (Pkt.) Jagatsundariprayogamálā (Pkt.) Jenitthaya Lagnasuddhi (Pkt. ) Dinasuddhi (Pkt.) Vattbusāra Rayanaparikkha
Suttapabuda Bohapābuda Carittapābuda Bbā vapāhuda Mokkbapābuda Lingapābuda Sīlapāhuda Barasa Anuvekkbā Pancadamaskārabhakti ( Pkt.) Tirtbankarabbakti (Pkt.) Siddhabbakti (Pkt.) Srutabbakti ( Pkt.) Caritrabbakti ( Pkt. ) Yogi( Anagara )bhakti (Pkt.) Ācāryabbakti ( Pkt.) Nirvāṇabhakti (Pkt.) Pancagurubhakti Pkt. )
20. Anthologies
Tārāyana Vajjālagga Gábārayanakosa Subhasiya pajjasamgaba Subhāsiyagābāsamgaba Gābāsābassi Chappannayagābão
Religious and Philosophical Works Mūlācāra Tiloyapampatti Bhagavati Arādhana (Pkt.) Dhavala (Satkbandāgama-Tikā ) ( Pkt.) Jayadhavala ( Pkt.) Mabādhavalā ( Mabābandha ) (Pkt. ) Ārādhanāsāra (Pkt. ) Pañcasamgraha (Pkt.) Laghunayacakra (Pkt. Darsanasāra (Pkt.) Tattvasara (Pkt. ) Bhävasamgraha (Pkt.) Srāvakācāra Vasupandi) ( Pkt.) Gommațasāra (Jivakānda, Karmakanda ) ( Pkt.) Karmaprakrti ( Pkt.) Trilokasära Pkt. ) Dravyasamgraba ( Pkt.) Labdbisāra (Kșa paņasära ) (Pkt. ) Jambuddīva panqattisamgaha Kattigeyāņupekkha Jñānasāra (Pkt. ) Chedasāstra, Chedapinda (Pkt.) Siddhäntasāra (Pkt. ) Kallānāloyaņā Angapannatti Bịhat-nayacakra (Pkt.)
JAIN SAURASENI (JŚ. ) 21. Pro-Canon and Later Works
Satkbandagama (Pkt.) Mabābandba (Pkt. ) Kasāyapāhuda Samayasăra (Pkt.) Pravaca nasāra (Pkt.) Pañcâstikāya (Pkt. ) Niyamasāra Rayanasara Damsaņapābuda
MAHĀRĀSTRĪ (M.) 23. Mābārāştri Works
Gābāsattasal Setubandha Rāvanavaba ) Lilāvas

Page #67

Mahartbamañjarī ( Pkt.) Śriciboak vya (Pkt.)
Kamsavaha
Usaniruddha
Verses from Alankara Literature Verses from Sanskrit Dramas
24. Poetics (Verses quoted) Kävyälaṁkāra Rudraja)
Dhvanyaloka
Vakroktijlvita
Sigaraprakäia Sarsvarkanthabharaṇa
Kavyaprakasa
Alamkarasarvasva
SahityamImämsä
Vägbbaṭālamkara
Kavyanasana (Hemacandra)
Kalpalatāviveka
Alamkaramabodadhi
Kävyänutäsana (Vägbhata)
Sahityadarpana
Rasärṇavasudhakara
Alamkararatnakara
Rasagangadhara
DRAMATIC PRAKRITS
25. Dramas
Dramas of Asvaghosa
Abbiṣeka
Avimāraka
Urabhanga
Karṇabbara
Cărudatta
Dütaghatotkaca
Dūtavakya
Pañcarātra
Pratijñāyaugandharāyaṇa
Pratima
Balacarita
Madhyama vyayoga Svapnavāsavadatta
Abhijaajakuntala Mālavikāgnimitra
Vikramorvaiya
Mṛccha katika
Kundamālā Mudrārākṣasa
Veṇīsamhāra
Bhagavadajjukiya
Nāgānanda
Priyadarika
XXXII
Ratnavall
Mattavilasa-prahasana Kaumudimahostava
Mabāvīracarita
Uttararāmacarita
Malatimādhava
Rāmābhyudaya
Anargharaghava
Tāpasavastarāja
Ascaryacuḍāmani
Subbadrādhanamjaya Tapatisamvarana
Naiṣadhananda Agam: dambara Balaramayana Viddhasalabbañjikā
Balabharata
Candakausika
Karnasundarī
Prabodhacandrodaya
Kaumudimitrānanda
Pārijātaharaṇa Mudritakumudacandra
Pārthaparakrama
Prasannaraghava Karpuracarita-bhāņa
Tripuradaba-dima
Rukminibaraṇa-ihāmṛga
Samudramantbana-sama vakāra
Häsyscudamani-prahasana
Kirätärjuniya-vyāyoga
Hammiramadamardana
Karuṇāvajrayudha
Mallikāmakaranda
Samkalpasuryodaya Subhadrā
Aljanapavanamjaya Dūtāngada
Pārvatīparinaya
Caitanyacandrodaya
Unmattaraghava (Vi.)
Vidagdhamadhava
Lalitamadhava
Kamsavadha
Janakiparinaya
Manmathonmathana
Mahānāṭaka
Unmattaraghava (Bhā.) Yayaticarita
Nalavila-nataka

Page #68

XXXIII
26. Sattakas (In Prakrit)
Karpūramañjari Candralekba Rambhämanjari Ābandasundari Smgāramanjari
APABHRAMŚA ( Apa.) 27. Apabhramsa Works
Paumacariu -- Svayambhu Rittbanemicariu Paramappapayāsu Yogasāra Mabapurana Jasabaracariu Nayakumaracariu Sāvayadhammadobā Pāsanāhacariu Bhavisatta kaba Kabākosu Jambūsāmicariu Sudamsanacariu Karakandacariu Vilásavaikaba Pabudadoba Paumasiricariu Suandbadahamikabi Dhammaparikkbā Vaddhamāņacariu Nemipābacariu (Sanamkumaracariu) Risaba-parana-samdhi Virajina-pārapaya-samdhi Gayasuumäla-samdhi Salibbadda-samdhi Avantisukumāla samdhi Chakkammuvaeso Jivānusathi-sardhi Anabi-samdhi Upadesa-rasāyapa rasa Kalasvarūpakulaka Caccari Mayanareba samdhi Mayanaparājayacariu Nammayāsundari-samdhi Samdesarásaka Capdappabacariu
Cauranga-bhāvana-samdhi Anandasāvaya-samdhi Aptaranga-samdhi Praksta-paingala Kesi-goyama-samdhi Bbāvanā-samdhi Sila-samdhi Uvabāna-samdhi Hematilayasuri-samdhi Tava-samdhi Anabi-mabarisi samdhi Uvaesa-samdbi Vayakabā Barasāņuvekkha Sirivālacariu Vikramorvasiya (Apa. Verses) Hemacapdra's grammar 8. 4. Apabhramsa verses from Alamkāra literature
Abhinavagupta Tantrasāra stanzas. 28. Prakrit Grammars (in Sanskrit
Nātyaśāstra (Bharata ) Prakrtaprakasa Prakrtamañjari Prākstalaksana Samksiptasara Prākstavyā karana (Hem.) Prākrtavya karana Trivi.) Prakrtānusasana Prakrtarūpávatāra Sadbbāsācandrika Prākstasañjivani Prakrtamanidi pa Prakrtacandrika Prakrtakalpataru Prakrtasarvasva Prakstādanda Pāua kosa
29. Metrics (Prakrit, Sanskrit )
Gātbālaksana Vsttajātisamuccaya Svayambhūchandas Chandonusāsana Chandolaksaņāni Chandaḥkośa Kavidarpaņa Prakrtapaingala
P.D. V

Page #69

GRAMMATICAL AND GENERAL ABBREVIATIONS
Gr.
ib.
Abl. Acc.
id.
j.e.
impf. impv.
infi. Inst.
act. adj. adn. adv. aor. App arch. asp. aug. Bv. card. caus.
intj. intra.
lit. Loc. m. m. c. med.
ct.
nog.
Nom.
comm. cump. cond. conj. correl. cpd. Dat. denom. desid. dimi.
Atmanepada Ablative Accusative active adjective addominal adverb aorist Appendix arcbaic aspect augment Babuvrībi cardinal causative compare commentary comparative conditional conjuction correlative compound Dative denominative desiderative diminutive dual Dvandva Dvigu Edition exempli gratia emendation enclitic otcetera etymology euphemism example exclamation feminine figurative foot pote following frequentative futare Genitive gender ger und
nu. obj. obs. onomat. opt. ord.
Grammar ibidem idem idest imperfect Imperative infix Instrumental Interjection intransitive line literal Locative masculine metri causa medial neuter negative Nominative numeral objective obsolete onomatopoetic optative ordinal Parasmaipada page paragraph pages past active participle passive pejorative person perfect plural postposition potential potential passivo participle past passive participle predicate prefix preposition proclitic pronoun present participle (active) present participle
(passive
Dv.
Dvg. Ed. e. g. em.
pp. pap. pass. pej. per.
encl.
Pf.
etc. etym. euphem.
pl. postpo. pot. potpp. ppp.
excl.
fig. F. N.
pred. prof.
foll.
freq. fut. Gen. gend. ger.
prep. procl. pron. pr. part. pr. part. pass.

Page #70

YIXY
term.
prvb. redup. refl. rel. sg. sub, subs. suff. superl. 8. v.
v.
preverb reduplication reflexive relative singular subject substantive suffiz superlative sub voce tadbhava
o.b.
termination transitive tatsama verb verse veria lectio Vocative volumo varlapt writing wrong reading
Voc.
Vol. v. W. w.r.
tbh.
LANGUAGES
Lat. L. Skt.
Abhi. AMg. Apa. As.
M.
Av.
Āva. Avh. Cân. Cl. Skt. CūPai. Dak. Desi.
Abbīri Ardha-Magadhi Apabbramsa Asokan Inscription Avestan Avanti Avabatthi Cāņdali Classical Sanskrit Culika Paisaci Däksinātā Desi word Gātba dialect Greek Hybrid Sanskrit Indo-European Indo-Iranian Jain Mābārāstrī Jain Sauraseni Jain Sanskrit
Mg. MIA. Nāg. NIA. Ni. Pra. OIA. Pā. Pai.
Latin Late Sapskrit Māhärästri Māgadhi Middle Indo-Aryan Nagara Now Indo-Aryan Niya Prakrit Old Indo-Aryan Pali Paisaci Prakrit Prācyā Sauraseni Sabari Sanskrit Takki or Dhakki Upanāgara
Pkt.
Ga.
Prā.
Gr. HySkt.
IE.
I. I. JM,
Sáb. Skt. Tāk. UpNāg. Ve.
JS.
Vodic
J. Skt.
Vrá.
Vrācada

Page #71

SYMBOLS
< > =
when an hyphen cannot be used without ambiguity the plus sign is used.
dash
derived from developing into semantically equivalent short syllable (micron) long syllable (macron) Upattested or reconstructed form other than those which are preceded by < hyphen is used to separate the morphological elements of a word or the constituents of a compound and the ICs of an expression.
.
?
in etymology of doubtful origin or pot of IndoAryan origin in other places, doubtful' a danda is used to indicate the end of a hemistich in case of motrical passages, but will not bo used if the passage is immediately followed by the reference (abbreviation and numbers ).
OTHER ABBREVIATIONS
AD.
anno Domini before Christ
Vikrama Samvat
BC. vs. Śs. Pů.
Sāg. Alpa paricitasaiddbāntikasabdakosa by
Sāgarānanda Jain Siko. Jainendrasiddhantakoka, 4 volumos, BJP.
1920 ff. JainLa. Jaina Laksaņāvali, 3 volumes Debru. Debrunner, Altindische Grammatik II.
2, Götingen 1954. Sch. Schubring, Die Lohre der Jainas, Leipzig
1935. w. Weber, Saptaśatakam des Hāla, Leipzig
1881.
Saka Samvat Pūrvabbäga Uttarabbāga Abbidhāparājendra Ardba-Māgadbi Dictionary Pāiyasaddamabapnavo
U. AR. AMgD. FSM.

Page #72

(aPage #73

भ
2
tenses of imperfect, aorist, pluperfect and conditional. AMg. alone has sporadically preserved augmented verbal forms in its older works. The following forms are noted आति आसी from a Ayar. 1. 1. 1. 3; 1. 9. 2. 4; 1. 9. 2. 7; 1. 9. 4. 3; 1. 9. 4. 16. अहेसि āyar 1936; अकासि अकासी āyar. 1. 1. 4. 3; 2. 2. 2. 4; Say. 1. 1. 3. 8; i. 2. 2. 4; 1. 2. 2. 8; 2. 1. 31. अभविंसु Sāy. 1. 23.20; 1.15 25; अतरिंसु Sīy 1 11.6; अक्खु Ayar. 1. 5. 1. 3; 1. 9. 1. 10; 1. 5. 2. 1; Sy. 1. 5. 2. Some doubtful cases are अच्छे, अभे āyar. 1.1.2.5 [Examples will be found under the respective words ]
अ
अ (a-Page #74

णय कीलापव्वयं समा रहा Lila 831; ( स्थापक) अज्जो भज्जभारिमा म जवणि अंतरे बट्टेति KapMan. 1. 12.3; (भूमी) पीय दश्सी अ कसिण सुद्दी अ VatthuSa 1.5; C In narration it is often used with each added sentence where it occurs in the second place. M. आलोएर अ विझं SetuBa 1.54; बोलेंति भ पेच्छता पडिमा संकेतधवलघणसंघाए Setu Ba. 1. 57; णवरि भ थोअत्थो अं अवंति ...। असारसूराभवा दिवसा GaudVa. 270; 363 413; णवरि अ SetuBa. 1. 36; 4. 2; 5.11; णरि अ Lila 441; GaSaSa 272; D If used with pronouns, conjunctions or adverbs, it emphasises their meaning. M. तस्स भ सोहग्गगुणं महिलासरिसं च साहसं मज्झ GaSaSa 331; ते अ जुआना ता गामसंपक्ष तं च अम्द तारुणं GaSaSa 6. 17; ता णीससिअ बराइभ जाव अ सासा पहुप्पति Ga Sasa. 2. 41; S. (मेनका ) इअं पच्चाणीदा सही अअं च अपरिखख महाराओ Vikramo. 1.49; (प्रतीहारी) तेण भ धारिपुव्वाई भूसणारं MudrāRa. 20. 13; ( करभक ) सो अ ससिणेहं बहुमणिदो णाभर अणेण MudraRs. 106. 8; (राजा) सह अ तणुलदाए दुम्बला जीविमासा KapMan. 2. 9; Apa. तो जाइअ अ कजि मइ अइआवलइ SandeRa. 113. However, Apa works avoid the use of अ ' and ' and use other words like fव, जो, जि, पुणु etc. for this purpose.
अ (a<- ka) (Gr.) [ also ग य ] most frequent with words ending in 3 and अ. M. अकअण्णुभ Ga Sasa. 5.45; ईसालु GāSaSa. 2.59; उज्जुभ GaSa Sa. 5. 38; गुणण्णुभ Ga Sasa. 3. 3; थाणुभ GaSasa. 3. 32; gear GaSaSa. 1. 24; far GaSaSa. 1. 30; बहुअ G#SaSa 1. 72; अअण्णुअ GaSaSa 3. 75; अक्खाणअ GaSaSa. 6. 17; थणभ GaSasa 376; मक्कडअ GaSaSa 1.63; सिविणअ GaSaSa 1.93; 4. 97; समओ GĀSaSa 335; 1.61; बालम GaSasa. 1. 57; अच्छा ( वृक्षक) SetuBa. 9 47; उत्तमअ SetuBa. 9.22; सारअ SetuBa. 3.48; 940; कडुअ SetuBa. 1. 61; गरुअ SetuBa. 2.1; मउअ SetuBa.6.9; लहुअ SetuBa. 3. 37; 4.13; अगरुअ GaudVa. 955; अप्फुलभ GaudVa. 998; कवाडअ GaudVa. 733; किसल्अ (?) GaudVa. 1067; गरुअ GaudVa. 80; 125 गुणण्णुअ GaudVa. 71; forerer Gaud Va. 74; 1194; age Gaud Va. 127; 1203; 2 GaudVa. 995; थणुलभ GaudVa. 325; दिअ अ GaudVa. 872; पयणुअ GaudVa. 50; पलहु GaudVa. 501 ; मरुमअ GaudVa. 784; लहु GaudVa. 23; 159; सकामिणीभ GaudVa. 486; Ś. दृअं Malavika. 3. 2; अंगुलीअअं Malavika. 4.1; 4.4; 7. 10; भीरुओ Malavika. 46. 2; परकेरअं Malavika. 41. 8; आहाणम KapMan. 4. 20.2; कुप्पास्अ KapMan. 1. 13; गोवअ KapMañ. 1. 21; दोहलअ KapMan. 2. 43; पट्टअ KapMañ. 1.5.6; सिविणअ KapManñ. 3. 2; . 3. 3; 3.4; 3. 8; मज्झअ KapMan. 3.21; AMg with inf. मोतुयं Dasave. 5.1.87; परिभोतुयं Dasave. 5. 1. 82; ger अलद्धयं Dasave. 9.3.4; इत्थगं Dasave. 5.1.83; उडुयं (Sch. ऋतुक) Dasave. 5. 1. 87. Compared to other Prakrits, Apabhramsa makes use of the a(ka) extension on a much larger scale. It is primarily due to the fact that a mono- or dissyllabic word cannot afford to change its final syllable to the Nom. ending without making the base indistinct. Hence an addition of a ka, .which then turns into an ए or ओ (later उ) in Mas. and अं in Neu., is found in a large number of cases. The Apa. verses from Vikramo give the following examples: अंगओ 31; आदत्तओ 8; आनंदओ 13; अलिद्धअं 2; 3; गइंदओ 18; गिरिकाणण, कुसुमुज्ञलए 10; हंसजुआणओ 6; णअणणं 2; णाहओ 26; पक्खओ 6; परवारणओ 11; लालसओ 11; लीगओ 13; लोमणओ 16; वमओ 15;
3
अभण
विमाणओ 31; समाउलओ 16; संताविकओ 21; सिणिद्ध अं 2. Some of these may have -ke as a samāsānta in case of the बहुव्रीहि cpds. We get in Paramapp परमप्पड 1 10 परिट्टियउ 1.14; कम्म विभिण्णउ 1.37; बिबियड 138; परिमंडियउ 1. 40; कम्मविवज्जिय 1. 52; जाणियउ 1.56; जणियउ ( जाणिउ ) 1.59. Most past. pass. participles thus show forms with pleonastic a) and also without it.
भ (aPage #75

अभंड
आह -बीए रअगीओ होंति दीहाओ GaSaSa. 846; cf. उत्तराभण Setuba. GaSaSa. 3.75. 9.83; दक्खिणाअण SetuBa. 4. 30.
अारण (a-aranaति>1) कविला वासुदेवा भदा मुणिमुम्बए अरहा कविलं वासुदेवं एवं अय(? अ)सिणो गुणेहि जाआ सुअणा जणम्मि समलम्मि Gaudva. 869. वयासी Naya. 1.16.272; आणंदा Uvās. 1.31; जंबु त्ति Naya.
अआ (a-aPage #76

-इ
अवसिय GaSaSa. 1.45; अइचितंतो GaSaSa 3.14; अइगओ SetuBa. 15.66; 8. अदिवादि Vikramo 4.0.12; Apa. अरेह- KarCa. 1. 3.10; अश्वंत PCa. (P.) 2.5.3; अइसच्छयह SandeRa. 133; 2 overcoming, transgressing, going against, violating, AMg. अइयच्च āyār. 1.6.2.2; 1.9.19; अच्चेही Suy. 1.2.3.7; अक्कमUvas. 47; Viy. 8. 10.13; Apa अइकमिउ PaumCa. (S.) 6.9.5; 3 much, abundant, excessive, superior, higher, AMg. अश्वेलं Ayãr. 1.8.8.8; अहदुक्ख āyār. 1.9.2.14; अइविज्जं āyār. 1.3.2.1; 1.4.3.3; अहदुक्खधम्म Sūy 1.5.1.18; अकंड्रइय Siy. 1.3.3.13; अइकाय Thāna. 105; अइतित्त Naya. 1.1.72; अरमार Uvās. 45; अइदूर Uvās. 208; अइअणिट्ठ RayPa. 767; अइसुबीमच्छ Niraya. 1.1.72; JM. असीयल KumaCa. (H.) 4.41; अइसेस DasaveNi. 183; अइरस KumāPra. 10.12; JŚ. असोहण Mok Pa. 24; अइदुग्गंध SraĀ. (V.) 169; M. अइदंसण GaSaSa 1.81; अभार SetuBa. 13.41; अहरमगीय Lila 945; S. अपंडुर Ram Man. 1. 36; Apa. अरविउल JasCa. 1.5.5; अरुंद NāyCa.(P.) 1.1.7; अघय Bhavika. 42.4; अइकालु San KuCa. 509.1; अश्तेयवंतु VaddhaCa. 1.10.11; अइतम PENC (P.) 16.4.3; (separated) अ हुय विरत्ति SudCa. (N.) 7.11.5; 4 beyond something, not subject to, free from, additional, AMg. अइरित āyar. 1.2.3.1; अश्वट्टं Say. 1. 4. 2. 2; अरजाए Thāna 4.1.34 (240) ; असेस Thāna. 4.2.254 (284); अइउक्स Dasave. 5.2.42; Samav. 20(1) ; अइरित्ततेज्जासणिए Dasa. 1.4; अहमंच Kapp. 100; JM. अइवेयर KumaCa. (H.) 4.46; अइमलय KumāCa. (H.) 4.34; मणोरहाइरित्त Kuma Pra. 10.16; Apa. अअहसयउ Maha Pu. (P.) 15.12.4; अश्चाउ JambiSaCa. 8. 14.9; अइसयमह PaNaCa (P.) 6.9.2. [Quotations and more precise meanings will be found under the words given]
अड् (ai aditi) f [ PMS also अदिति ] the presiding deity of the constellation called पुणव्वसूणक्खत्त, AMg दो अदिती Thāna. 2.3.324 (95) (comm. पुनर्वस्वोर्द्वित्वात् अदितिद्वित्वम् ); पुणब्वसू अदितिदेवयाए SūraP. 1012 (83) ; सोमे रुदे अदिती बहस्सई सप्पे Jambuddi. 7.171 ( 1 ) ( comm. नक्षत्राणामधिदैवतद्वारा नामप्रतिपादनाय गाथाद्वयमाह p. 533) ; सोमरुद्द अदितीवहस्सती चेव Joiska. 149.
अइईसा (aiisā < atirsya) f. excessive jealousy or rivalry, Apa. अपसंग अइईसाकरणे, वह असुद्धभाव जुवईयणु SudCa. (N.)
4.10.3.
अइउक्कस (ai-ukkasaatyutkarsa ) adj. going beyond pride or idea of greatness, AMg मज्जप्पमायविरओ तवस्सी अइउको
Desave. 5.2.42.
अइउग्ग (ai-uggaatyugra ) adj. very formidable, very frightening, Apa. जणियदरिण अइउन्गपवणिण । संछाइय दिसि भरिय SanKuCa. 580.2.
<
अइउच्च (ai ucca aty-ucca) adj. very high (place), AMg. नाइउच्चे व णीए वा पिंडं पडिगाहेज संजए Utt. 1.34. ( Dev. नात्युच्चे प्रासादोपरिभूमिकादौ ); JM. वैजयंतीओ। सनंति व रविणो सारहिस्स अउच्चगमणट्ठा SurSuCa. 1.70.
अइउच्चाय (ai- uccãya Page #77

माइउजल
भइकमिय
Apa. अश्उच्चिय मणहर वेइ किय KarCa. 7.7.11.
अगुसमयं ViMaPra. 13.20. (v. 25) अइउम्जल (ai-ujjalaPage #78

अइकम्म
(ai-kamma < ati-karman) n. wicked deed, crime, Apa. अन्नें वुत्तु पउरमाहये अश्कम्महो किर कारें वियप्पे BhaviKa. 184.7.
अइकलुण (ai-kalunaati-karuna) adj. very piteous JM. अडकलुणगग्गयक्खरं च रोहउं पयत्ता CaupCa. 224.16. साक्या (ai-kasukkadayā ati-kasiyautkata-tā) f. extreme intensity of the passions, JM अश्वसायु( उकडयाए य तेण बर्द्ध अप्परट्ठाणे णरए आउयं CaupCa. 103.7.
अकसिण (ai- kasina ati- krsna ) adj. very black, pitch black, JM. जीहग्गे (ग्ग) अश्कक्षिण अग्नं तं होइ जस्स गुरुतिलयं Rit Samu 30 : अश्कसिणनिद्धजलहरखंड पिव लोयलोयणाणंदो ( गिरिवरो) JugaJica. v. 538; v. 49.
अइकाय (ai-kāyaPage #79

भइतचारि
भइक्खा सव्वकामविरया सम्वसिणेहारवंता अकोहा Uvav. 130; से य सम्वसिणे- दुक्कड Av. 19; 83; 92; AurPacc.(VI.) 5.2.8; जो मे कोइ देवसिओ हातिकते सम्वचारित्तपरिवुडे Dasa. 10. 33; 4 pertaining to an earlier राइओ उत्तिमटे अइक्कमो अईयारो अणायारो तस्स मिच्छामि दुकडे AurPacc. event, AMg. दसविधे पञ्चक्खाणे, अणागतमतिकतं नियंटितं चेव Thana. (VI.) 11; आहाकम्मनिमंतणं पडिसुणमाणो अश्कमो होइ PindaNi. 10 (748); अणागयमात ... पच्चक्खाणं भवे दसहा Viy. 7.2.34(1); 179; मणुया भविस्संति ... मज्जायतिकमप्यहाणा JambuddI. 2.1333; Apa. JM. अणागयमकतं कोडियसहियं (पञ्चक्खाणं) AvNi. 1514; तमश्कतं परिसहइ अइक्कमु माणु तासु VaddhaCa. 5.2.8; 3 violation of the तेणेव हेउणा तवा जे उड़े PavSaro. 190.
limit of the prescribed time (for begging), JM. कालाइकमपरववएसं अइक्कंतचारि (ai-kkanta-cariPage #80

भसद्ध
परमाधार्मिकविकुर्वित नरकनदी तत्सङ्गे तदवाप्तिहेतुत्वात्, अतीक्ष्णवैतरणी वा p.49)
अइखद्ध (ai-khaddha ati- khādita) n. excessive eating, JM. कुक्कुडिअंटगमित्त अविगियवयणो उ पविखवे कवलं । अरखद्धकारगं वा जं च अणालोइयं होज्जा OghaNiBl. 279
अइर्खनिय (ai-khantiya < ati- ksünt-ika) f. very forgiving i. e. a nun, Apa. अवंतियहि समीवि पसत्थी जिणवरगुणसंपत्ति वउत्थी Maha Pu. (P.) 90.16.7.
अइखर (ai-khara > ati- khara) adj. very harsh or severe, M. कुसुममआ वि अखरा ... कामस्स सरा बहुविअप्पा GĀSaSa. 4.26.
argfat (ai-khinniPage #81

अगाद
अगाढ (ai-gādha ati-canda) adj. very terrible, JM.
विज्जाहराइचंडा गंगाहरमहिहरा नानं PaumCa.(V.) 8.195.
अह पिय (ai-campiya Page #82

बइच्छंत
भई छिम to, AMg. कोबुग्गमरयोधूते असा त्तमतिगच्यति IsiBhas. 36.8; JM. सो संगेण य से आहारे नो सम्मं परिणमइ Naya. 1.19.39. च्चिक्ष सोबखं अइच्छइ Kumi.Ca.(H.) 7.6; 2 to go away, JM. अइजागरिय (ai-jagariyaPage #83

भइणिरुत्त
3 escaped from, M. ओह रिअवंचिआईछिअसिमग्गावतवाणरजोह रहसविअलिअकण्हाइणणिअलिए. मुणिअगम्मि Gau Va. 1190; सुसिलिट्ठSetuBa. 13.28 ; ( Hem.(Gr.) 4.187 वृत्ति reads आईछ for अछ) गरि?णिड्डरप्फुडवग्घाइणचिक्कगप्पहं । परिवेढइ ... कटीतर्ड Us.ini. 2.25%; ___ अट्ट (aittha Page #84

अइणिविड
13
अइतेया
णिम्भरु कियउ चित्तु KarCa. 5.14.5.
चिंतइ अतिक्खदुक्खसंतत्ता NiPanka. 1.66; B very sharp (in भइणिविड (ai-nivida Page #85

अरवितुरंग
अदुगंध
10.82.2.
समाहारा चैव तहा, तेया य तहेव अइतेया JambuddI 7.120.2; SuraP. ing very fiercely, JM पिसुणो अहदित्तग्गी नेहसहस्साई झत्ति जो जिरह GäRaKo. 75; 2 anger or hatred which is very fierce, GāRaKo. 75.
भइदिहि (ai- dihi ati tvarayita - turanga) adj. who has urged the horse to great speed, M. अइतोर वियतुरंगो पेच्छत्थगिरिं समलियइ Lila. 218.
अइतोस (ai-tosa Page #86

अइदुगंधिय
15
अइसमा mely bad smell, IS. हा हा बह णिल्लोष किमिकुलभरियमि अइदुगंधम्मि (N.) 8.6.8. SraA.(V.) 196.
अहदलंभ (ai-dullambhaPage #87

भइसह
16
' अइपडाग
अइदूसमा छट्ठी PavaSaro. 1034; तावइओ चेव भवे कालो अदूसमाए वि अइनिम्भर (ai-nibbharaPage #88

अपटुवयण
mounting another banner, AMg. पुण्णभद्दे नाम चेइए होत्या... सच्छत्ते सज्झ सघंटे सपडागार पडागमंडिए Uvav. 2; अरिट्टनेमिस्स छत्ताइछत्तं पास Niya. 1.5.29; अप्पेगइया देवा सूरियानं विमानं णाणा विहरागो सियझण्डागारपदागमंडियं करोति RiyPa 281; तेसिं णं तोरणा उपि बहने छत्ताइछत्ता पागाइपडागा अच्छा जाव परिस्वा
पढागारपटा
Jivabhi. 3.291.
...
***
अइपडुचयण (ai-padu-vayana Page #89

भाइपास
18
अइबाला
अतिश्यति p. 49b.]
1 the fifth future Vasudeva in the Bharata region of the अइपास (ai-pāsa Page #90

19
अइभत्ती
भइमलयवाउ अतिपाला अतिबुड्डा घासत्ती गम्भिणी य अंधलिया Mala. 469(6) different, Apa. तणुफैसगंधकण्णहँ समिद्धि जीवहो अइभिण्णी स्वसिद्धि
अइभत्ती (ai-bhattiPage #91

भइमाह
20
अहमुत्ति
अइमल्ह- (ai-malha-Page #92

अइमुद्ध
21
अइयारमलकलंक
अइमुद्ध (ai-muddha Page #93

बइयारवल्लह
भइरहस्स
नद्धा DhamRaPa. 104.
fa young bride, अणुबहुआइरजुबई DENaMa. 1.48 (comm. सामा-- अइयारवल्लह (aiyara-vallahaPage #94

-अहरा
अइ रिक्त 11.9.15.
Anga. 69.9; 4 Indra's wife, अइराणी इंदाणी, DENIMa. 1.58; अइरा (aira Page #95

अइरित्तसेज्जासणिय
भइरेय निब्भर
भब्यसरीरातिरित्तमिह दब्बमंगलं होइ ViAvBha. 46; गणणाइ पमाणेण य कणयखचियंतकम्मं ... अंसुयं पवरपरिहियाओ (धण्णाओ णं ताओ अम्मयाओ) अइरितं बहइ उगवरणं UVMR. 3743; अयलो पुण महाधणो देइ मणोरहाइरितं Nayit. 1.1.33; पभाए .. हिंगुलयनिगररूबाइरेगरेहतरुस्सिरीप दिवायरे ध Kumapra. 10.163 सिरिवद्धमाणसरि पबमाणारित्तगुणनिलओ Gan- अहकमेण उदिए Niy.:.1.1.24: हयलालापलवाइरेगं ... देवदसजय RiyPa. SadSa. 633; 4 empty, void, ततो सा रुती भणइ मया पुत्तबच्छलअ- 285; JIvibhi. 3.4.51; Viy. 9.190; (जपणू ) मंसलपसत्थसुबद्धसंधी रित्तहिययाए न नायं Vasudi. 29.12.
___ कयलीखंभातिरेव.संठिय ... Parhi. 4.83; JM. पंच व छ व सत्तसए अइरेग __अडरित्तसेज्जासणिय (airitta-seilasaniyaPage #96

इरेह
अइरेह (ai-reha - Page #97

इदरिस
Kalka.(Dharm.) 47.
अवरिस (ai-varisa Page #98

अविरत्ति
with, JM रत्तो वि अविरत्तो तीए भइकुरचरिएहिं Erz. 76.34.
अविरत्ति (ai-viratti ati- vi- rakti) f [note अइ ... विरक्ति ] great dejection, Apa. मुक्कउ कराउ अझ हुय विरति SudCa. (N.) 7.11.5. afa (ai-virasara ati-vi-rasam) adv. with great howl, M. अविरसं विरसंतो धरणियले पाढिओ सहसा Lila 1203; JM सा भद्दा वाहिपीडिया सुट्टु अविर आनंद NāPañika. 3.43,
agfafta (ai-viriya ati-virya) m. name of various kings, 1 a king of the a family, JM अविरिओ य नरिंदो तस्य पुत्तो महाविरिओ PaumCa. (V) 5.5 2 king of the town of] नंदावर्त, JM. अस्थि सिरिअरवरिओ नंदावत्ते पुरे महाराया PaumCa (V) 37.3; 3 father-in-law of लक्ष्मण, JM अरविरियस्स सुयाए तणओ वि य हव सिरिकेसी PaumCa. (V.) 91.24.
अइविसण्ण (ai-visanna ati- vi- sanna ) adj. [f. ma] very much dejected, JM सुणिऊण अविसण्णा सत्थिमई दुक्खिया जाया PaumCa. (V) 11.19.
afan (ai-visama < ati-viṣama) adj. [f. -a] very difficult, JM. अविसमा पव्वज्जा विसया वियसंतविसतरुसरिच्छा CaupCa 28.20; अक्सिमो मोहतरु Erz. 4. 29; अइविसमा कम्मगई विसमदरो तीए कज्जपरिणामो JugāJica. 1. 295; धरेनि नाम च सावयाणं पि । तं पि पहु महाचोज्जं अविसमे दूसमे काले SatthiSa 159.
afar (ai-visāyāPage #99

भाइसणि
अइसयसुक्किन lled, AMg. अइसंजओ वि मोसेण होर तणपेलवो पुरिसो ArāhPad. extraordinary, JM. सामण्णकेवलुम्भवअइस्यकुसुमोहबुट्ठीओ PaumCa. (V.) 525.
(v.) 1. 36; अइसयनाणवियाणियतिहुयणगयवत्थुपरमत्थो JugiJICa.v.577%B __ अइयणिद्ध (ai-saniddha Page #100

- अससुंदर
wager (aisaya-sundara < atiśaya-sundara) adj. very beautiful, Apa. घणत्रूराडंबरि अइरायसुंदरि वित्तउ बद्धावणयरसु Gaya Sari. 8.11.
अइसयसुरूय (aisaya-surūyaPage #101

30
भाइसुहिय (ai-suhiyaPage #102

भईय
31
मउणचर
2 to enter, JM. ण य अहं से अण्णम्मि अइगए. उज्जाणे अण्णो ManoKa. 30.16; Apa. साहू वि य अईव निम्विन्नउ काणणे सच्चबाउ
ईद AVTI.(H.) p. 173a.33; मा अर्नाह सामी सो भणइ किं निमित्तं पडिवनउ KaKo. 3.4.7; 2.3.1. .AVTI.(H.) 173a.6%3 सा च अगया। रणो धरं अईद, नाया Etz. अईवरूढ (aiva-ridha < ativa-rādha) adj. well-esta54.2; तत्थ य तुंगभुदारं भूमि-गय-विमाण-पुंडरीय-समं पासाय-बडेसवरं blished, JM. पइदिणमालाव-सलावेहिं अईवरूढमागओ सिणेहाणुबंधो सवयंसो सो अईसीय TarLo. 6223 3 to form, to contact JM. Manoka. 27.32.. मोक्ख पि हु अणुवज्जा अईह न हु जो जवासंगं KumiCa.(H.) 7.63B अईसंत (aisantaauana> auna==ekona) adj. पडिबुद्धस्स वा जो मे कोई देवसिओ राइओ उत्तिमढे अइकमो वहकमो अध्यारो [mostly in cpds. forming larger numbers; Pischel = a-guna अणायारो तस्स मिच्छामि दुई AurPacc.(v.) 11; दंसणणाणचरिते doubtful) adj. [also aunā rhythmic lengthening] less than one पव्वज्जाईसु जो अईयारो। तं सब्वं आलोएहि MaranVi. 48; वज्जित्तु तओ (not counting one), cf. ckona and una in Sanskrit. सम्भं वज्जेइ इमे भईयारे SriDhaViPra.79 (comm. वर्जयित्वा प्रत्याख्याय। अउट्टि (aunatthi=ekonasasthi) m. sixty less one = वधमिति प्रकृतम् ) f. अयार.
___ fifty-nine, AMg. समणोबासगाणं एगा सयसहस्सी अउट्टि च सहस्सा भईव (aiva< ativa) adv. very much, greatly, AMg. तमो उक्कोसिया Kapp. 136. णं पभिइ तं कुलं विपुलेणं हिरणेणं...अईव अईव परिवडर Ayar. 2.15.12; अउणतीस (auna-tisa=ekonatrimsat) nu. thirty less one, 133; भईव अईव उवसोभेमाणे उबसोभेमाणे चिट्ठइ Viy. 1.2.12 (p.15.3): twenty-nine, AMg. (देवदत्ता गणिया) अउणतीसं विसेसे रममाणी Naya. 1.1.202%; तवेणं तेपणं तवतेयसिरीए अईव उबसोभेमाणी चिइ Naya. 1.3.83 सागरा अउणतीस तु उक्कोसेणं ठिई भवे Utt. 36.2403 Antag. 146%3; सा देवदत्ता दारिया रूवेण अईव अईव उविदा Viva. एकावण्णे जोयणसए अउणतीसं च सट्ठिभागे SuraP. 2.33; पणुवीस अउणतीसा 1.9.34; सिरिए भईव अईव उसोभेमाणा Jambuddi. 2.837.213: उकामहपरिरओहोर Jivabhi. 3.226.5. मुक्षुप्फपुंजोवयारकलिए सिरीए अईव उवसोभेमाणे चिट्ठ Jivabhi. 3.580; अउणतीसह (auna-tisaiPage #103

मउणसरि
अउल.
पब्वयसया भवंति Jambuddi. 6.10.
SurSuca. 2.1183; त पि हु अन्नह जायं मज्झ अउन्नेहिं पावाए. SurSuCa. अउणत्तरि (aunattari = ekona-saptati) m. seventy 6.25%; adj. lacking in merit, unfortunate, evil, M. सो अम्ह less one, sixty-nine, AMg. समगोवासगाणं एगा सयसहस्सी अउणत्तरि अउण्णाणं कत्थ व केहि पि दुट्ठसत्तूहि । अवहरिओ Lila. 691%; JM. अवरे च सहस्सा उक्कोसिया समणोवासगसंपया होत्था Kapp. 178; (चंदे) पंच भगंति एसा केण वि माया कया अउण्णेणं PaumCa.(V.) 28.112; ताव जोयण सहस्साई एगं च पणवीसं जोयणसयं अउणत्तरं च णउप भागसए गच्छइ मरंति अउण्णा रहिया ववसायसारेणं KuvMaka. 38.31; भयबं जं ते कहियं मंडलं Jambuddi. 7.82; JM. नवपंचाणउअसर उदयविगप्पेहिं मोहिया मह दुचरियं इमं अउण्णस्स KuvMiKa. 49.11; ण य चितेइ अउण्णो कत्थ जीवा । अउण(?ण)त्तरि एगुत्तरि पयविदसएहि विनेआ Sat.(C.) 22. कुड़वं कहि अहयं KuvMaka. 186.33; ता कह मज्झ भउन्नस्स होज्ज पावस्स
अउणपण्ण (auna-pannaackona-paricasat) m. fifty नित्थारो SurSuCa. 2.51; 3.214; हा पुत्तय ! - इहि पि अकयदसण less one, forty-nine, AMg. एगोरुयपरिक्खेवो नव चेव सयाई अउण- कत्थ गओ मह अउन्नाए SurSuCa. 14.10; कह मन्झ अउन्नाए. कम्मविवागो quurte Jivabhi. 3.226.3.
इमो जाओ NaPaiKa. 5.70. अउणपण्णास (auna-pannāsa = ekona-paicasat) m. अउण्ड (a-unhaPage #106

35
अंवय ( anvaya <āmra-ka) m. mango tree, Apa. ar विसस्स बिंदु तम्मि झत्ति पत्तु अंवयम्मि Dham Par. 3.2.2; अंवयस्स मल छिण्णु Dham Par. 3.2.7.
अंवथमंजरि (amvaya-mañjari < āmraka mañjari ) / flowering cluster of the mango tree, Apa. अंबयमंजरि तोमर करंतु मलयाणिलगयवरि संचरंतु ( मयणराउ ) CandappaCa. (Y.) 2.14.3.
अंबर (amvara Page #107

अंसिया 36
अंसुई अमिया (amsiya < arsika) f. piles, hemmorrhoids or विरलसियसुयसंपाउयवयणकमललायण्णा । लीलावई गरिदेण Lila. 1299%3B some kind of boils in the nose etc., AMg. तस्स य अंसियाओ 7573 स कडेड सणिों से थणंसुअं Usani. 4.49%; (विदूषक) ओलंसुओलालंबंति तं च वेज्जे अदक्ल ईसिं पाडेति, ईसिं अंसियाओ छिदेजा Viy. लिअत णुलआए सुंदरसम्बस्समिमीअ दिट्ठी KapMan. 1.28%; (राजा) 16.3.10 (comm, अंसियाओ त्ति अर्शासि तानि च नासिकासक्तानीति च मज्झण्हे सिरिखंडपंककलणा आसझमोलमु KapMan. 4.43; 4.10%B AMg. चूर्णिकारः)
तसि तारिसर्गसि सयणिज्जसि ... मुविरइयग्यत्ताणे रत्तंसुयस पुए सुरम्म Viy. अंस (amsuamsu) m. ray, M. वियडणहंगणगमणवसायास- प्राइम्ब गोरिभहे सहि उव्वत्ता नयणसर Hem.(Gr.)4.414; अंसुजलोहलिउ वियलियसुभरो। णिस्थामो अवरमहीहरेंदसिहरं गओ मूरो Lila.436%; इह ता कवोल खित्त JambuSaCa. 4.11.1. मिहिरंसुसंच तिमिरोहो परिहोदुमीहइ Usani. 2.58; JM. रयणीरमणं अंसुणिवाअ (amsu-nivda Page #108

"सुमंत
of the Vidyadhara king Candagai, JM घेतूण बालयं तं अंसुमईए सुहं पसुताए । सुकुमालकोमलंगं जंबुदेसम्मि संठवइ PaumCa.(V.) 26.82; अंसुमईऍ महायस समप्पियो वा अहं तओ पढमं PaumCa. (V) 30.58. अंसुमंत (amsumanta Page #109

मकाकर
भकंडतलिम
मकजं करेइ तप्पश्चया पुणो PindNI. 185%; कज्जमकज्जे खरवक्कसदुट्ठनिटर- भिक्खू साहिगरणं अविओसवियपाहुडं अकडपायच्छित्तं परं तिरायाओ...संभुज्जइ गिराए । भगिए. Gaccha.56; JM. विद्धि अहो अकज्जं कि कीरइ Nis. 10.14; 2 not produced, not created (i.e. eternal), खेयराण रिद्धीए PaumCa.(V.) 13.14%; करेइ तं पसुबई अकज्जं पि AMg. इच्चेते पंचमहन्भूया अणिम्मिया अणिम्माविया अकडा णो कित्तिमा Dhutt. 3.683; गज्जद धम्माधम्म कजाकजं हियं अणहियं च KuvMaka. Say. 2.1.26. 4.20%; अहो कज्जाकज्जावियारणं ति KuvMiKa. 11.2; जो य... अलसो अकडजोगि (akada-jogiPage #110

-अकंडविद्दर . 39
अर्कतदुल्स अकंटबिद्दर (akanda-viddara < akānda-vidrava?) m. अकदपरियम्म (a-kada-pariyamma < a-krta-parikaruntimely trouble, JM. ता किमणेण अकंडविरेण KaKoPra. 40.2. man) adj. who has not made any suitable preparations, JS.
अकंग (a-kanduga Page #111

गतसर
अकंबल
इत्यर्थः p. 380)
अकप्पणिज (a-kappanijja Page #112

41
(a-kamma Page #113

42
कम्मविवि
not possessing any karman, AMg तस्स णं ( सम्मत्तपरक मस्स) वेण अरुप्सु ओयणेसु को रोसो MallMak. 1. 80. अयमट्टे एवमाहिज्ञ, तं जहा संवेगे ... अम्मया Utt. 29. para. 2; ( तं बद्धं पुटुं उदोत्थिं वैश्यं णिज्जिणं सेयाले अकम्मं चावि भवर Utt. 29. para. 71)
sraffin (a-kamma-viriya Page #114

अकयत्थ
(a-kayattha Page #115

करण नियम
अकलंकिन
(6.8)
णं करणओ असायं वेयणं वेयंति नो अकरणओ असायं वेयणं वेयंति Viy. 6.1.7 निम्मलमुजायनिस्वहयदेहधारी ( महावीरे) Uvav. 16; Jivabhi. 3.596; Jambuddi. 2.15; Tand. 66; Panha 4.7 (comm. मांसोपचितत्वाद् अविद्यमानपृष्ठिपार्श्वास्थिकम् or मांसलतया अनुपलक्ष्यमाणदृष्ठिवंशास्थिकम् p. 81a)
अकरणनियम (a-karana- niyama) m. the rule of not doing (evil), JM होउ मे अकरणनियमो PañSu. 9; not doing any violation as a rule देसविरइगुणठाणे अकरणणियमस्स एव सम्भावो UvPay.
729.
अकरणय (a-karanayaa-karana ka ) n. non-performance, JM सरअरणयं अणवद्वियस्स तह अरुरणयं चैव SrāDhaViPra. 96.
44
अकरणया (a-karana-yaa-karana-ta) / the state of not doing or avoiding ( something), AMg से विरतो आउसो गाहावई, एतस्स अकरणयाए āyair. 1.8.2.2; से वसुमं सब्वसमण्णा गयपण्णाणेणं अन्यापेण के अकरणयाए आउट्टे āyar. 1.8.4.2; अश्वत्तियं अणाउट्टैि सयमण्णे सिं अकरणयाए āyar. 1.9.117; निरगंधाण वा निग्गंधीण वा पन्वावित्तए अकरणयाए अन्भुट्ठित्तए Thana. 2.1( 66 ) ; 3.3 (176) ; पढिकमामि निंदामि गरिहामि विउद्यामि विसोहेमि अकरणयाए अन्भुट्ठेमि Viy. 8.6.7(251) ; तं निरमंतु णं देवाणुपिया एयमट्टम्स अकरणयाए Viy. 15.132 (15.174) ; एयरस ठाणस्स अकरणयाए अम्भुट्ठेहि Nāya. 1.16.115; सामाइयस्स सइअकरणया सामाइयस्स अणवट्ठियस्त करणया Uvas. 53 (comm. स्मृति: स्मरणं तस्याः प्रबल प्रमादतया अकरणम् ); सामाइयस्स समणोवासएणं इमे पंच अश्यारा जाणियब्वा तं जहा सामाइयस्स सरअकरणया āv. 86; पडिक्कमाभि चाउक्कालं सज्ज्ञायस्स अकरणयाए āva. 19; तस्स ठाणस्स अकरणयाए
***
fer Dasa. 10.34; Vava. 1.33.
अकरणाल (a-karanāla Page #116

अकलत
45
अकसायब
सयल वि किउ अकलं किउ थिउ सकलंकित चंदतण PINACa. 10.11.10. wonderful (Rudra) without askull, Apa. अकवालचोज्ज जो देउ
अकलत्त (a-kalattaPage #117

46
अकसिण (a-kasina Page #118

कामक
·(pr. part.) not loving, not desiring, S. ( मण्डोदरी ) महाराएण असोअवणिअं पविeिr लदावलअंतरिदाओ भविअ तस्सि अकामअमाणाअं सीदाअं महाराअस्स कामुअवत्तिणं पेविखअ ओहसस्सामो āścaCu 5.1.20.
अकामक ( akāmaka) adj. [also अकामग] without desire, AMg. अकामगं परमं को ते वारेउमरहर Siy. 1.3.2.7; ( अम्मापियरो) ताहे अकामकाई चेव मेहं कुमारं एवं बयासी Niya. 1.1.114; Antag. 6.95; तत्थेव मया अकामका बंधिऊण पादेसु कड्डिया खाइयाए छूटा Panha. 3.17; 1.35; ताहे अमए चेव सुभद्दाए निक्खमणं अगुमन्नित्था Niraya. 117; बालमरणाणि बहुसो बहुयाणि अकामगाणि मरणाणि । मरिहिंति ते वराया . Aur Pacc. (V) 45; अकामए कालगए सिद्धिं पत्ते अकामए IsiBhas. 14.1.9; cf. अकामय.
अकामकाम (a-kāma kāma) adj. who does not long for pleasure, AMg. संवं जहेज अकामकामे अण्णाएसी परिव्वएस भिक्खू
Utt. 15.1.
अकमकिच्च (a-kāma-kicca Page #119

अकारणाहार
संसाररूहियोयभूवं सममव पावक वि सुयममयभूयं वयणं CaupCa. 13.25.
48
अकारणाहार (a-kāranāhāra) m. taking food without reason, JM. इंगाले चउगुरुया चउलहु घूमे अकारणाहारे ViMa Pra. 86.5 (v. 67)
अकारय (a-kāra (ya) Page #120

बकालमचु
কিন্তু
at an improper time, 5. (शाक्यभिक्षु) अकालभोअणा वेरमणं सिक्खापदं चउवासपरियाए अंतमकासी Kapp. 146; अण्णोणं मारेउ अस्थनिमित्तं MatViPra. 14.6.
मतिमकासि ArāhPad.(V.) 6553B JS. बारत्तिओ वि कम्मं अकासि जह अकालमरचु (a-kāla-maccua-kāla-hinam) adv. with- AMg. निग्गषेण य गाहावाकुलं पिंडवायपटियाए पविटुंणं अन्नयरे अकिच्चदाणे out loss of time, JM. ता अकालहीणं पेसेह कुमारं KaKoPra. 4.7%; पडिसेबिए, तस्स णं एवं भवइ Viy. 8.6.7[1] (8.251); 10.2.8[1] तसो कालहीणं तह विहअज्झावयप्पभावेण SurSuCa. 3.27.
(10.20); भिक्खू य अन्नयरं अकिच्चट्ठाणं पडिसेवित्ता आलोएज्जा Vava. 2.1. अकालाणयण (a-kālānayanaPage #121

50
भकिचणया
having nothing, possessionlessness, JŚ. खंतीमद्दव अज्जवलाघवतवसंजमो अत्रिणा ।... दस धम्मा Mūla. 754 (8)
अकिंचणया (a- kiñcana-yāPage #122

भकिरियाया
अकुक्कुप गोयमा सिय तिकिरिए सिय चउकिरिए सिय पंचकिरिए, सिय अकिरिए Viy. part, AMg. (अधम्मपक्खस्स विभंगे) तस्स णं इमाई तिष्णि तेवट्ठाई 8.6.258 (8.258): वोदाणेणं अकिरियं जणयइ । अकिरियाए भवित्ता तओ पावादुयसयाई भवतीति मक्खायाई, तं जहा-किरियावाईणं अकिरियावाईण पच्छा सिज्झइ ... सम्बदुक्खाणमत करेइ Utt. 29.28%; जे भिक्खू अकिरिए Siy. 2.2.76; चत्तारि वादिसमोसरणा पण्णत्ता, ते जहा - किरियावादी अलसए अकोहे अमाणे ...णो आर्मसं पुरओ करेजा Say.2.1.60%; 2.2.44%; अकिरियावादी Thina. 4.4.530 (4.345): अट्र अकिरियावाई पण्णत्ता, तं 2.4.24; तत्थ गं जे ते असंसारसमावण्णा ते णं सिद्धा, सिद्धाणं अकिरिया जहा-एगावाई, अणेगावाई ... णसंति परलोगवाई Thana. 8.22 (8.607); Pannav. 22.7 (573); तत्थ जे ते वीयरागसंजया ते णं अकिरिया चउरासीतीए अकिरियावादीणं Samav. 1373; कह ण भंते समोसरणा पन्नत्ता। Pannav. 17.1.25 (1142): जीवा ण भंते कि सकिरिया अकिरिया। गोयमा चत्तारि समोसरणा पन्नत्ता, तं जहा -किरियावादी अकिरियावादी गोयमा जीवा सकिरिया वि अरिया वि Pannav. 22.7(1573); JM. स Viy. 30.1.1 (30.1) एवं ... अकिरिए सहावसटिए अतणाण अणंतदरुणे PanSu. 45; 2 dcing अकिलिट्ठ (a-kilittha Page #123

अकुसाह
भकुंकुम (a-kunkuma) adj. without saffron, M. अकुंकुम- आसणे उवचिट्ठज्जा अनुच्चे अकुए थिरे Utt. 1.30. मचंदणं दसदिसाव:मंडणं ... भियंक किरणावली KapMain. 3.26.
अकुरुडकभुरुडुकं (a-kurudukka-bhurudukkamPage #124

सम्मोदय
मकुसलं साहुगणय रहणिज्जं अधम्मजणणं भणंति Panha. 2.11; तत्थ विय सारा भी वितविभूषा अकुसला Parhā. 3.22; Apa. (निज्जर) मोक्खबंध मे एहिं नियाणिय कुसला कुसलमूल परियाणिय JambiSaCa. 11.9.3; दुइमुहभुंजणरहो निज्जरा अकुसल अट्टरउद्द निरंतर JambushCa. 11.9.5; अकुसलकुसलकज्ज विहि सयलह अविचितिउ विश्रयह सुवणखलह VaddhCa. 4. 12.5; n. evil, ill fate, JM. जइ वि तुनं अम्हाणं उवरि निन्नेहो, तहा वि अम्हे तुम्ह अकुसलं रक्खेमो Erz. 52.15.
अकुसलकम्मोदय (a-kusala-kammodaya Page #125

54
अकोसायंत
भर्कत सब्वत्तो तु अकोसे अग्गुप्जाणाओ जा खेत्तं KappBha. 3.4842; बाधातम्मि 4.14.9; चक्ककित्तिवद्धावणए दुका तं भरहेसरहो RitNeCa. 10.7.22; तहो अकोस अडवि जले सावए, तेणे KappBha. 3.4844.
तणउं तणूरुह अक्ककित्ति VaddhaCa. 3.30.63 4.2.5%3 5.8.11. अकोसायंत (a-kosayantaPage #126

55
अकंतदुक्ख
भकमित्ता the usual limits], M. अर्कतं च पवुड्डे (प्रवृद्धे) DENaMa. 1.9; नल- अक्कंदिय (a-kkandiyaPage #127

मिय
रूहिं अक्कमित्ता Panha. 1.29; 2 having mixed with, (विससंजुत्तस्स उज्झणा ) एगंतमणावाए अचित्ते थंडिले गुरुवइट्टे । छारेण अक्कमित्ता तिट्ठाणं सावणं कुज्जा OghNi. 604 (comm. छारेण भूत्या आक्रम्य मिश्रीकृत्य )
अमिय (a-kkamiya < Ā-kram-ita = ä - krānta ) adj. conquered, JM. ( पालइ रज्जं ) सिरिभुवणाणंदनिवो अक्कमिया से सरिउचक्को SupasCa. 4.327; अक्कमिओ मिच्छत्तप्पमुहमहामोहकडगेणं BhuvKevCa 1062; Apa. एत्थंतरे दाणवदलणु सूरु वि पहरहिं अक्कमिङ SudCa. (N.)
8.16.9.
56
अमिय (a-kkamiya Page #128

भकोस
1.16.28%; इमेण मे अण्णयरे सयणसंबंधिपरियणे मारिए त्ति कट्ट अप्पेगश्या Ca.(S.) 1.14.73; परिपुच्छिय लइ अक्खहो दवत्ति PaumCa.(S.) 16.1.2 अकोसति Antag. 6.55; अकोसेज्जा परो भिक्खुं न तेति पडिसजले Utt. (comm. कथयत ); पुरि अक्खइ सुत्तउ कामवाणु दरिसइ व कुसुमधूली2.24: JM. जइ भक्तोसइ बालो तहा वि लाहो त्ति णवर णायब्बो वियागु MahaPu.(P.) 58.4.6%3 कवणु एतु पिययम किं किं णरु भक्खु KuvMaKa. 81.43 2 to cry loudly, to lament, Mg. (शकार) जम्खु कि पिणरु विसरु MahaPu (P.) 30.12.2; का वि तरंगहि भकोश विकोश लवाहि चंडं Mrcch. 1.420.
तिवलिउ लक्खड सारिच्छउ तहो मुहयहो अक्खइ NayaCa.(P.) 3.8.7%3B भक्कोस (a-kkosaPage #129

58
अवल
ड) पास सकंचण अक्खथड्ड सविहीणकरकुलफलरनड़ Jambāsāca 5.8.34 (also the name of Rivara's son ); 2 the nut of the tree [PäiLaNa. 7991; Apa. चउरासु वि जो अखरहियारु SudCa (N.) 2.4.8; वोरक्खाभलमेत्ताहार (ए छक्का) Mahi Pe (P.) 2.8.9; 3 dice, AMg कुजए अपराजए जहा अदिदि दीवयं Say. 1. 2.2.23; JM सारि व्व बंधवहरण माइणो जिवन होनि पर ि अक्वेहि वि हीरंता Rsa Pañi. 32; M. दिव्तमहं नहि जहिच्छं Usani. 1.63; S. ( दमयन्ती ) अहो हदेसुं असुं अहिणिवेसो अज्जउत्तस्त्र Naisa. 4.4.11.
4
अक्ख ( akkha Page #130

अणवेल
सपि अक्खणयकारयं पुरिसं । परिवंचिऊण वञ्चलि MuSuvvaCa. 244; जस्थ पुण सो चिया सयं पेसर अक्खणयकारओ पुरिसी । अन्नपुरिसल्स पासे
MuSuvvaCa. 245.
अक्खणवेल ( akkhanavela ) Desi. 1. अखगवेलं रयप्पओ सेसु DeNaMà. 1.59 (comm. अक्खणवेलं सुरतं प्रदोषश्च ); 1 intercourse 2 evening.
अक्खणहँ ( akkhanahā ākhyātum ) inf. [ Gen. of the noun akkhana] to tell, to speak of Apa. अन्नु जु तुच्छउँ तहें धण तं अक्खणहं न जाइ Hem. (Gr.) 4.350.
अक्खणिआ ( akkhania) Desi. reversed coition, PailaMa. 432 वावडया अक्खणिआ.
अक्खणिय ( akkhaniya) Desi [comm. व्याकुल, better व्यापृत ] adj. lingering on, devoted to given to JM रायकुलं मुत्तग्गोदयमग्गणपरं सव्वं अक्खणियं VasuHi. (M.) 226.9; इयउलावक्खणिओ जाओ णायरजणो सब्बो PuhCa. 87.24 ( comm. अक्खणिओ त्ति व्याकुल: ); वहुवरवरधन्नाउसदाणवखणियाणणो जाओ PuhCa. 108.4 (comm. आशीर्दानव्याकुलाननः ); अने ( तावसकुमारे) नासानिमियदिट्टिणो अक्खमालाढलणक्खणियपाणिणो PuhCa. 141. 14; अजं चेवागओ, विक्खणखण (? णि) याओ य नेह पत्तो म्हि PuhCa. 96.12 (comm. वार्यव्याकुलत्वात ); पियसहि धीरा होइ एत्थ कज्जे देव्वो चेव अक्खणिओ CaupCa. 110.6.
59
अक्खंड (a-kkhanda - a- khanda) adj. unbroken, complete, perfect, AMg संवयर भदं ते अखंडचारितपागरा Nandi ga. 4; निस्सह स्सेह महब्वयाई अक्खंडनिब्बणगुणाइं Bhatta P. 135; निस्सलस्सेह महन्वयाई अखंड निव्यणगुणाई । उवहम्मंति ... सहेहिं Ārih Pad. (V) 680; JM.. एत्थं पुण अश्यारा नो परिसुद्धेसु होंति सव्वेसु । अक्खंडविरइभावा SrauDhaViPra. 103; अखंड सिवसोक्खं जइ वंछह ता तयं कुणह MaViCa.(G.) 16a.1(2); 2a.5(1); अक्खंडपयाणेहिं रवीरपुरे गओ कुमरो SupäsCa.
18.146.
LaNa. 25.
अक्खंडिन (a-kkhandia Page #131

सक्खमालिया
60
अक्खयणिहि
Ca.(v.) 66. 313 Apa. अक्खमालढालणि गियमियमण कयकमलासण ण आसि, ण कयाइ णत्थि ण कयाइ ण भविस्सइ, भुर्वि च भवह य भविस्सइ णं कमलासण DhamPar.1.18.10.
य धुवा णियया सासया अक्खया, अव्वया अवट्ठिया णिचा Jivabhi. 3.59%B भक्खमालिया (akkha-maliyaPage #132

क्य
Viva. 137; JM ताणि भणंति, एसा अन्ह अक्खयंणिही, जर सिप्प सिक्खसि अहेहिं य समं हिंडत तो ते देमो AvTT. (H) 360a. 1; Apa परधणु पुणु तु जं दीसइ अक्खयनिहि तं महु करे निवसर JambuSiCa 3.14.19; 2 a kind of penance, fasting for as many days as are required to fill up a jar with a handful of rice grains per day, JM. देवग्गठदियकलसो जा पुन्नो अक्खयाण मुट्ठीए । जो तत्थ सद्धि सरसो तवो तमक्खयनिहि बेंति PavSaro. 1554 (p. 440); जहा जिंगपुरओ कोसी पादिखिमतंजावरवदिति पूरिज तः वश्यदिणाणि एगासणगाई अक्सयनिहितको ViMFra. 27.9.
wwwner (a-kkhaya-taiya Page #133

62
भक्खरच्चुय
na ) n. arrangement of words, M. ( नट) कविण हु अक्खरगुंफणिण महिलण थोरथणेहिं । अन्न व रसहस्थवक्कडा छइल छालिजइहि जेहि Ram
Man. 1.12.
www (a-kkhara-ccuyaPage #134

भक्खरावरणीय
- अक्खराणुसारेण अरविसेसा तयं सुयं सव्वं ViāvBha. 144.
अश्खरावरणीय (a-kkharāvaraniya aksarāvaraniya) adj. covering the word-knowledge, JS. Satāg. 5.5.49; cf. अक्खरसमासावरणीय.
63
अक्खर वली (a-kkharāvali aksarāvali ) / a row of letters, S. ( स्थापक) हंत अक्बरावलीओ लिहिदाओ ānaSu. 1.4(2) अक्खरोवलंभ (a-kkharovalambhaPage #135

64
अपखाइ (a-kkhai Page #136

Meanin
अक्खियमेसी
JS. जदि सहहृदि ण अत्थे आदपधाणे जिणक्खादे PavSa. 3.64; सब्ब जगस्स Mrech. 8. 223; Apa. एकहिं अक्खिहि सावणु अन्नहिं भवउ Hem. हिदकरो धम्मो तित्थंकरेहिं अक्खादो Mula. 752 ( 8 ) (Gr.) 4.357.2; 4.396; महिलिय दिति सलाइय अक्खिहिं SandeRĀ. 176.
अक्खा भिमंतण ( akkhābhimantana aksābhimantrana) n. pronouncing a spell on the aksa seed, JM तओ गुरू सूरिमंतेण चंदणघणसारचच्चिय अवखाभिमंतणे कए निसिज्जाओ उट्ठित्ता ... खनासमणपुब्वं भणावेr ViMāPra. 66.13.
अक्खामिता (a-kkhāmitta Page #137

मक्खियय
66
भक्खुखि measure as laid down, Apa. जाणिज्जइ फुडु अविखयमे ती लक्खसपण AMg. अक्खीणझंझे पुरिसे महामोइं पकुव्वइ Samav. 30[1] ga." जि कोडि पउत्ती MahaPu.(P.) 2.6.2.
(p. 381. 1. 16); JM. ई सव्वं मुमं वयसि अक्खीणझंझए सया AVTI. भक्खियय (a-kkhiya-ya Page #138

अक्षुण्ण
67
भक्खंग्वयं
मम्मप्पएसघाएण गया पंचत्तं KakoPra. 37.28%; तस्स अक्खुडियस्स एगो य (अदिण्णादाणस्स) णामाणि गोण्णाणि होंति तीसं, तं जहा- अक्खेवो . घडो भिण्णो, तेण पडतेण विइओ विभिण्णो AVTI.(H.) 555b.8; अक्खु- विक्खेवो Panha. 3.2 (comm. आक्षेपः परद्रव्यस्य इति गम्यते); 3 imडिओ पखुडिओ टिकतो विय सबालबुडजणो। जीवउ चंपयमाल त्ति जंपिरो plication, entailment, JM. एवं चिय विन्नेओ सफलो नाएण पुरिसगारो वियरए. तत्थ SupāsCa. 4.226.
वि। तेण तहक्खेवाओ स अन्नहाडकारणो ण भवे UvPay. 1002; दश्वेण __ अक्खुण्ण (a-kkhunnaPage #139

part.) to be told, Apa. अक्खेब्बउ काई नराहिवासु Bhavika 227.8 अक्खोड- (akkhoda - 2 ) . [Hem. 4. 188 अतिविषयस्य कृषे रक्खोड इत्यादेशो भवति ; Laksmi. (Gr.) 3.1.110; Trivi. (Gr.) 3.1.110] 1 to tear, to turn over, AMg. तए णं ते पावसियालगा जेणेव ते कुम्मगा . खोलेंति नहेहिं आलुपति दंतेहि य अखोडेंति Naya 1.4.11; 2 to whisk, to shake, AMg से भिक्खू वा भिक्खुणी वा उदओलं वा वत्थं न अखोडेज्जा न पक्खोडेजा Dasave. 4. 8 (para); (caus.) to cause to shake, न अखोडावेजा न पखोडावेजा Dasave. 4.8 (para)
...
अक्खोड ( akkhoda <ākhota or aksota ) m. the wall-nut tree, AMg दाडिमाण वा पारेवाण वा अवखोडाण वा चोराण वा बोराण बा • बंधणाओ विमुक्काणं. अहे बसाए गई पत्तर से तं वंधणविनोयगई Pannav. 16.55 (16. 1122 ); 17.132 (17.1235 ); Apa. अक्लोडदाडि मकलमसा लिदालिवंजणसुसकिय SanKuCa. 746.2.
...
68
अखंड
चाणक भरह आगमवियाणु PĀNĀCa. 9.6.5; JŚ. अक्खोहा सायरो ब्व मुणिवसहा āyārBha 6; जायर अक्सयणिहिरयणसामियो अक्खरहि अवखोहो śrāvā. (V.) 484; m. 1 absence of distraction, AMg. जह देवीए अक्खोहो पत्तो सट्टाणजीवियसुहाई Naya 1.9.54. gā.9; 2 name of a Vrsni king, JM. शूवि ( १ मि )या अक्खोहेण दिट्ठी CampCa 184.14 पाठपरिसठियामुत्पराया CampCa.
186.28.
अक्खोड ( akkhoda < ? ) m 1 whisking, shaking, JM. दिपिडिगा नव अक्खोडा नवेव पक्खोडा PavSaro. 96; 2 fold of a cloth, JM. अक्खोडभंगपरिहरणा ĀvTi on Ni.1236, p. 552, 1.13. अक्खोडंत ( akkhodanta < ?) adj. ( pr. part.) shaking, whisking, AMg. ( उदओलं वा वत्थं ) अखोडतं वा पयखोटं वा समजावा Dasave. 4. 8 (para)
न
अवखोडिअ ( akkhodia = a- krsta ) adj. drawn, taken out, JM अक्खोडिआसितिक्खं ... बम्हं KumāCa. (H) 7.33.
अक्खोभ (a-kkhobha aksobha or aksobhya) adj. not disturbed, not agitated, which cannot be agitated, AMg. अक्खोभे सागरो व्व विमिष Pagha. 10.11; Jambuddi. 3.3; अक्खोभस्स भगवओ संवसमुदस्य संघस्स ( भई) Nandi gā 11; Tittho 691; JS. णिब्ववएण तदो से चित्तं खवयस्स गिब्ववेदव्वं । अक्खोण खमाए जुसेण पणट्टमाणेण Bhaāra. 498; मेरु व्व णिप्पकंपा अक्खोभा सागरो ब्व गंभीरा Bhaāra. 1536; JM. (पूयाए उवरि बंदणं) मुद्दा एत्थुस्सग्गो अक्खोभो होह जिणत्रिष्णो Pañca Pra. 4. 29 (comm. अक्षोमो अचडितस्वरूपः ); m. name of one or two sons of Andhakavṛṣṇi and Dharani and younger brother of Samudravijaya, a dasarna, AMg अयले कंपिले खलु अक्खोम पसेणई दण्ही Antag. 4; 16; JM दस दसारा परिवसंति तं जहा समुद्रविजओ अक्खोभो ... बसुदेवो त्ति VasuHi 77.14; समागया सेमा वि भायरो अक्खोभादी तं च अहं समागमं सुगभागा VasuHi. 365.23.
...
अक्खोह (akkhoha Page #140

H
अखंडचरण
69
'अखमा
अखंड वियाणि तुहुँ अप्पपएसहि सब्व Paremapp. 2.22.
अखंडिदचारित्त (a-khandida-carittaPage #141

असंपण
Viy. 12.5.3.
अखंपण (a-khampana < ?) Desi. adj. clean clear, not dusty, JM. के वि हु ... आयवत्तारं । धारिति ठविंति पुरो अखंपणं दप्पणं fa SupasCa. 2.598 (p. 74)
अखय (a-khaya Page #142

71
अखेम (a-khemaPage #143

बगहादत
बगणिकाय अगडदत्त (agada-dattaPage #144

अगणिकायत
से तेयलिपुत्ते सुक्कंसि तणकडसि अगणिकायं पक्खिवर Naya. 1.14.76%3; बहवे na-sthana)n. place where the fire is enkindled, AMg. जे अयकुंटीओ अप्पेगइयाओ ... अगणिकायंसि अदहिया चिटुंति Viva. 120; भिक्खू वा मिक्खुणी वा सेज्जं पुण थंडिलं जाणेजा.- विसभक्खणट्ठाणेसुवा पलालेण वा वेद्वित्ता अगणिकापणं झामिजा RiyPa. 767; जावं च अगणिफंटणट्टाणेसु वा ... यो उच्चारपासवणं वोसिरेजा Ayar. 2.10.19 बायरे भगणिकाप तावं च णं अस्सि लोए ति पबुचर Jivabhi. 3.841; (658) से गं भंते अगणिकायस्स मज्दामहोणं वीईवएज्जा Anuog. 343(2)
अगणिमह (agani-mahaPage #145

जागवितणावाग
14
जगमिय
अगतिसमावनग (a-gati-samāvanna-gaPage #146

अगंभीरा
लक्षणो गमः, यथा आदिविशेषे तावत् रह छज्जीवणिकेत्यादि गमाः, दुर्गपदव्याख्या p. 161; भन्नेऽर्धजाते यत् सदृशाक्षरालापकं तद् गमिकं । अन्यच्च गाथा लोकवेष्टका सदृशपाठात्मकत्वात अगमिकम् p. 161 ); Devendra on Karma. 1.6, तथा गमाः सदृशपाठाः ते विद्यन्ते यत्र तद् गमिकं । तत् प्रायो दृष्टिवागतम् । अगनिकं असदृशाक्षरालापकम् । तत्प्रायः कालिकतगतम् ]
अगंभीरा (a-gambhirā ) adj. (f.) not profound, shallow, AMg. अगंभीराओ इत्थीओ Tand. 155.
75
अगम्म (a-gamma agamya) adj. 1 which cannot be approached or reached M. ता तुज्झ सो अगम्मो सुरलोओ जत्थ सइ शिवासो म्ह Lil 656; JM महासइहिययं व परपुरिसागर मधवल समुत्तुंगपायारपरिवेदियं Manoka. 3.5; गम्भागम्मविभागं मोत्तुं विसयाण सेवणं कुह SurSuCa. 12.52; Apa. अगं अगम्मं पमोत्तण गं मं MahāPu. (P.) 47. 1. 6 4 8 11; हुअ सलिलि अत्याहिं अगम्म Bhavika. 119.9; 123.6; तहिं समए भूअ रक्खस मिलति दिट्ठिहिँ अगम्म भोयणु गि ंति SudCa. (N.) 6.9.8; 2 not to be approached sexually, Apa. अहो सुंदरं होइ एयं ण कज्जं । अगम्मं पि गंतूण खद्धं अखज्जं Bhavika. 56.3.
०.
अगम्मगमण (a-gamma gamana agamyāgamana) adj. who cannot be sexually approached, JM. गणिआजणणी भणोपमुहे पुणो अगमगमणेसु BhuvKevCa. 255.
अगम्मगामि (a-gamma gāmi Page #147

16
महिषगहण
(2.45); जीवस्स अगस्यलहुयत्तं पडुच्च जीवंतस्स वा तुलियस्स मुयस्स वा अगन्ध (a-gavvaPage #148

भगदत्त
अगणिकाय
अगडदत्त (agada-datta.avata-datta) m. 1 name of a पयावण जलावणदिसणेहिं अगणि (हणंति) Panhi. 1.163; बादरतेउकाश्या prince, cf. Erz. p. 68ff., JM. धन्ना विरत्तचित्ता हवंति जब अगडदत्ताई अणेगविहा ... अची अलाए सुद्धागणी Pannav.1.26 (1.31(1)); पुढविदगSiloM:.86; 2 one of the men bearing that name, JM. ताण य अगणिमारुअवाउवणस्सद तसाण विविहाणं Gaccha. 75; JS. पुढवी य अहं पुत्तो अगडदत्तो नाम नामेणं VasuHi. 36.5%3 52.26.
उदगमगणी वाउ बणाकदि जीवमंसिदा काया Pancsa. 110; गाल जाल अञ्ची भगडदहर (agada-dadduracavata-dardura) m. frog मुम्मुर सुद्धागणी य अगणी य। ते जाण तेउजीवा Mula. 211(5) in a weii, AME. से जहानामए, अगतदहरे सिया Niya. 1.8.1543 अगणिअ (a-ganiaca-ganita) adj. (PPP.) [also अगणिय] 1.16.200.
1 neglected, not cared for, M. पीलुआरक्षणेकादिण्णमणा । अगणिअगमह (agada-mahakavata-maha) m. festival ofa अविणिवाअभआ परेण समं वर का GiSasa. 2.23 अगणिअजणाचwell. AMy. अगामहे ? वा नईमहे ? वा RayPa. 284.6; अगाममुवा वा अवस्थिभगअणं वरा।। तीए ... चिरं कण GaSasa. 5.843; JM. तहागमहेसु वा Ayar. 2.1.24(337); Nis. 8.!4.
यो वि पटु एस पीरो ...। अगणियपडिवववभयो कील: कन्नाण म.अम्मि अगडसुय (a-gada-suya .a-krta-Sruta) alj. who has Pauna.(V.) 8.40; अगणियसमविमभाणं साहसतुंगे सभारुहंताणं । रक्षः not studied the scriptures, AMg. नो कप्पद वहूर्ण अगडसुयाणं पगयो धीराण मणं ... दश्वो Vajlag. 110; अगणियपरिम्समो तो परेसिमुवयारकरणबत्थए Vivi. 6.43; 6.5.
दुल्ललिओ ViMAPra. 68.25%; दसियनिम्मलनिञ्चलदंतगणोऽगणिअमाव उत्थअगढिय (a-gadhiya ca-rdhita-a-grddha) adj. not भओ।... सूरी जिणवहहो होत्था MayaRa. 18; 2 uncountable, very covetous, not greedy [syn. agilitha], AMg. स तत्थ अमुच्छिा . numerous, many. M. पत्तो अविहावियपढपरिस्समो अगणिपहि दियसेहि अगिद्धे अगहिए अणज्झोववष्णे बहुसानमेव मुंजेजा Ayar. 2.1.57(357); Lila. 920; परबई अगणिएहिं दियएहिं । संपत्तो ... सत्तगोयावरीभीमं Lila. अहुणोववणे देव देवलोमेसु दिव्येसु कामभोगेसु अनुच्छिर अगिद्धे अगदिए 1147; S. (विद्धक) अगणिपहिं अगग्धेहिं उम्मीलंतबहलदीहमोहलेदुजो... तस्स एवं भव Thana. 3.362(183); जेणं निग्गये अगिद्धे अगदिप अग्वजोआविअसहस्मरस्सीहिं महारअणसहस्सेहिं पृरिअं खुदे कोसघरअं आहारं आहारद Viy.7.1.18 (7.23); महावीरे अमुच्छिप, अगणि - आहारं CandLe. 1.28(1): Apa. अगणिय णिसिदिणु नवरइ कहि मि न विरमः सरीरकोटुगंति परिखबह Viy. 15.128 (15.162); तत्थ णं अत्मश्या आमा कारणु तउ वि महालउ JambasaCa. 5.7.26%; (पुव्वदेस ) जो भूसिउ ... तेसु ... गंधेसु अमुच्छ्यिा अगदिया गिट्टा ... दुरंदूरे अवकमंति Niya. णयणमुहावहिं अगणियग्यणायरगयवणेहिं VaddhaCa. 1.3.83; पुवखलवइ1.17.24; 1.19.43; Antag.6.57; Anuttaro.3.27; अण्णाप अगदिए विसयन्मि विसालए ... अगणियगोहणमंडियमहियल VaddhaCa. 2.10.3; अदृट्टे - भिक्ख भिक्खेसमाए. निरए Par.hit. 6.20.
कर धरिवि चढायउ करिवन्दि जो सेविउ अगणियभमरविंद SiViCa.2.6.6. अगण- (a-gana-Page #149

78
नगार
for the resident of a house or householder, AMg दुविहे सामाइए पन्नत्ते, तं जहा - अगारसामाहि (इ) ए चेव अणगारसामाइए चेव Thana 2.3.249 (2.78)
अगारि (agāri Page #150

मगिठाणा
वेयावडियं साइज्जिस्सामि Ayar. 1.8.5.3(219)
गुरुकुलवासाओ, कह, तमो गीओ PaicaPra. 11.9 (comm. अगीयस्स अगिलाणया (a-gilana-yaPage #151

30
अगुह(
बहुपजयाब)
एवं तु अगुणप्पेही गुणाणं च विवज्जो Dasave. 5.2.41.
nor light. n. the name of a particular nāma-karman which अगुणवीसा (a-guna-visa Page #152

मगुरुलहुपरिणाम
__
अग्ण
अगुरुलहपरिणाम (a-guru-lahu-parināma Page #153

82
अगगगन
description, अद्दभग्गौ परिहासे वर्णने च Kram. (Gr.) 5.96.35. अग्ग (agga-aPage #154

भग्गजझवयण
भग्गमहल
ग्गजीहे ... दिसोदिसि विप्पलाइत्था Niya. 1.1.159; Uvas. 95%3; सज्ज 4.65. च अग्गजीहाए. उरेण रिसई सरं Anuog. gh. 26.
अग्गपगुम (agga-paesaPage #155

अग्गमंश
84
अग्गविंदु
he top, M. दीसंति अग्गमइला कमेण मू-जला गिरिणो GaulVa. 625. गं चलिययाण अग्गल घरंति CandappaCa.(Y.) 4.6.3; चके खंडु
अग्गर्मश (agga-mainsaPage #156

अग्गविषाण
अग्गविषाण (agga-visana agra-visāna ) . the tip of the horn, Mg (वृद्धगोपालः । अग्णी वि एपो वबभा धवलंगो अविवाहि महि उव्वतो विअ पोदि BilCa. 3.0.2.
85
अग्गवेअ (agga-vea agra-vega?) Delf flood, पूरम्मि अग्गओ DeNaMa. 1.29 (comm. नदीपूरः, सरिआग अगवे दूमंति झत्ति लोअं)
•••|
अग्गत्रेग (agga-vega Page #157

भग्गहार
भग्गिडपजीवि Apa. णं आगहरहस्थि पाट्ठर राउल 3 PaumCa.(S.) 65.3.9. तत्थ महेत्ता अग्गि पाडेइ, पाडेत्ता अग्गि संधुक्खेइ अग्गि उज्जालेइ Naya.
अग्गहार (agga-haraPage #158

अगिक
अभिि
AMg.
lives on tending the fire, JM. अच्छी अग्गिउपजीविं वा आहितग्गिं CaupCa. 39.35; 2 one of the groups of the कोसि अगोन्त, वा बूया AngVi. 28.160.20. जे कोसिआ से सत्तविधा पण्णत्ता, तं जहा ते कोसिआ ते यच्चायणा अग्गिच्चा ते लोहिच्चा Thana. 7.35 (551)
अगञ्चाभ (aggiccābhaPage #159

अगिभणिया
अगिभर
पाति ... पाणिणा धरेह । णो यहु अग्गिभणियं कुज्जा Sy. 2.2.77(718) JM. अह तेण अग्गिपउरो पायारो जोयणासयं रइओ PaumCa.(V.) 12.45.
अग्गिथंभणिया (aggi-thambhaniyaPage #160

भणिभूम
(सोमदेव and अग्गिजाला) ताण सुया दोन्नि विवखाया, पढमो य अग्गिभूई दुइज्जओ वाउभूर त्ति AkkhaMako p. 76. 171.
afna (aggi-bhūya< agni-bhūta) adj. which has become like fire, fiery, AMg. ( वज्जेह) वायं असमाहिकरं विसग्गिभूए कसाए य ārah Pad. (V.) 181.
अभिगम (aggima agrima) adj. [ also अग्गिमय ] which is in front, first, hence excellent, JM पयडं तं पिव सिवमग्गमग्गिनं सिरिसुपास जिणं SupasCa. 1.5; तीए तिण्णि पुक्खराणि कयाणि अग्गिमस्स पच्छिमस्स मज्झिमस्स य ( खंधावारस्स) Erz. 32.14; अग्गिमओ (वच्छो) आउहरो VatthuSa 1.21; Apa. सयलपयत्थहँ जं गहणु जीवहँ अग्गिमु होइ Paramappa. 2.34 ( comm. अग्रिमं सविकल्पज्ञानात् पूर्वम् ); ता गच्छइ कयहरिसु अग्गिमम्मि मग्गम्मि तुरियउ SanKuCa. 557.5; adv. in front, JM. इदाणिं तीरपत्ताए नावाए उत्तरंतो न लोअअग्गिमो उत्तरह OghNišI. 33b.6 (the text has पुरओ v. 38 )
अग्गिमकंड (aggima-kanda agrima-kānda ) n the foremost or excellent_arrow, Apa (देविचउक्कं ) मणिमय कुंडल मंडियगंड कामपणुद्धर अग्गिमकंडे Jamb Saca. 8.5.7.
-
अग्गिमखंध (aggima khandha < agrima-skandha) m. the front of the army, the vanguard, AMg से किं तं मीसदब्बवे । तं जहा – सेणाए अग्गिमखंधे, सेणाए मज्झिमखंषे AnuOg. 64; JM पत्तो अग्गिमखंधं विहीसणो तस्स संगामे PaumCa. (V. ) 8.239; Apa. पढम भिडंत अग्निमखंधई PaumCa. (S) 8.6.1; थिय अग्गिमखवेहिं णीलणल PaumCa. (S.) 12.8.3; जो अग्गिमसंधि अनंतपालु तहो करमि अज्जु रणि पलयकालु Bhavika. 246.5; 2332; 235.5.
अग्निगमगणियारि (aggima-ganiyari agrima-agrimakarenu) f. the foremost cow-elephant, Apa. अग्गिमगणियारिह चडिय धाइ णिसिपुरउ परिट्ठिय संज्झ णाइ PaumCa.(S.) 7.3.3.
अग्गिमगाम (aggimagāmaPage #161

अग्गिरस
90
अग्गिसित
भग्गिरस (aggirasaPage #162

भागसिहर
जग्गीफुलिंग
कुसुमपुरे अग्गिसिहो खमओ लिंगद्धओ य अरुणो त्ति UvPay. 4863 (ii) जमग्निहोत्ताइ सग्गकामस्स। वेयविहियं विहण्णइ दाणाइफलं च लोयम्मि a son of Agnibhiti, JM. अलाया अम्ह पिया अग्गिसिहाभिहाणेण मित्तेण ViAvBhi. 1640; समाढतं अग्निहोत्तं माहणेण KakoPra. 5.2. समं ... गोदीए चिट्ठ: Erz. 14.133; Apa. भगिउ अग्गिसिहु सोसइँ-जणणे अग्गिहोत्तकंड (aggi-hotta-kunda Page #163

"अग्गीवाण
अग्गीवाण (aggi-binaagni bapa) m. a fiery arrow, Apa. सिरि एकेकं पलियाँ ( ? उं ) पहुँ अग्गीवाणु । नीसरु जोव्वणपाहुणा जर खंडेसी माणु ChaGa 155.
अग्गीय (aggiya Page #164

अग्य
GäSaSa. 6.98; AMg को दाणि तस्स सक्का कार्ड अग्धं अणग्धस्स Samth. 46; JM. अग्धस्स तु परिवडि ओसरणं व पुण सब्वभंडाणं AngVi. 250.9; एरिसे अग्धे बट्टमाणे, एतस्स एतेण एत्तियं दिण्णं ĀvTI. (H.) 826.10: मयगहिल विन्भमाणं गयाण पवियंभए अग्बो GaRaKo. 250; cf. महाध.
अग्घ (aggha Page #165

अग्बोन
... कंचयं VajLag. 595%38 मिट्ठो .. आकिंचणगुणगारवग्यविओ जाधम्मो वाण-कास महंग-अग्घाडग-साम-सिंदुवारे य Pannav. 1.37(4) [1.42] CaupCa. 331.17; बट्टा हेमंतो ... अग्धविअन्तेल-कुंकुराकामिणीयण-जलण- [JAS. V. 1. अगघाडग] पावरणो KumāPra. 111.18; 299.133; जे नियमइ-विहवेणं कुणंति कव्वं अग्घाण (agghana) DesT. adj. satisfied, content, अग्घाणो गुणग्धवियं Manoka. 1.15.
अग्गइओ तित्तम्मि DONIMi. 1.19%; परिमलपाणग्धाणो ब्व अगिल्लसमीरणो अग्धविय (agghaviyaPage #166

ম
offering, 5. (अनसूया) जाव अहं अग्घोदअं उबकप्पेमि Sak. 39.18 (4) अघ (agha) n. sin, an abominable thing, JM जिणउ कलिं अणि सुशिक्षगुणगणा घुणिआ देहि वि जगनुपक्षी सुअ-देवी सथल- अघ लुणणी KumaCa. (H.) 7.69; S. ( विदूषक) अघ बम्हणभावं PratiYau. 3.1.27.
अघ (aghaagādha ? ) m. name of a lake (deep), AMg. भारस्स पव्वयस्स अहे एत्थ णं महं एगे हरए अधे पण्णत्ते Viy. 2.5.27 (2.112) (comm. अधेति अघाभिधानः )
95
भघडंत (a-ghadanta Page #167

अघादिपविभाग
अघादिपडिभाग (a-ghadi-padibhāga Page #168

अंकग
97
(comm. अणं तप्तायःशलाकयाऽङ्ककरणं); JM. सत्तवहवेहबंधणडहणंकण.- अंकमुहसंठिता बाहिं सत्थीमुहसंठिता (तावक्खेत्तठिई पण्णत्ता) SirPa. 4.33 निग्विणमणलो आमविवागं AVTI.(H.) 588a.133; जे डहर्णकणताडण .. 4.6%B7. दुक्खसायरोगाढा KuvMiKa. 64.7; 30.31; दमगंकणवाहणाईयं (दुक्खं अंकय (?अक्य) (ankaya (?akkaya)Page #169

98
अनि
भकुल चलणकमलोवयाररायकिया भूमी LIla. 390; भुआणं संख, ककिआणं पदावो कजं ण पज्जत्तं LIla. 76; Apa. कुलिसकुडिलंकुरारावलीराइयं धगधगतं Usini. 2.67%; cf. अंकिय.
. पुरो चक्कमुद्धाइयं MahaPu.(P.) 77.12.21; 2 a sharp point, अकिक्ष (ankia) DesT. | fig. use of अंकित ?] embrace, अंकिअ the tip, an early growth, the source, JM. पुलयंकुरेहि क.
लिओ अवडियाओ य परिरंभे DENIMa. 1.11; (महिलावरंघियाओ बीहंति उउंबरो उंबरेहिं व KumiCa.(H.) 2.77; M. णितग्गिगम्भिणाय व विवेअअंकिया मुणिणो)
थोउभिण्णरअणंकुरट्ठाणाई SetuBa. (Basak) 9.61; वच्चंति अहो उर्दू - [अंकिइल (ankiilla) Deif. wrong reading of AR and अईति मूलंकुर व्व पुहवीए Gaudva. 722; (राजा) सुंदरीम बहला PSM. for अंकिल av.1. for नट्टग Uvav. comm. p. 3a.1 नर्तका ये पुलअंकुराली KapMan. 4.21; Apa. अणुमग्गें तहो पविणहरंकुर सोणहए हि नृत्यन्ति, अंकिल्ला इत्ये के।
- मुक्क णिय कुक्कुर JasCa. 3. 35.3; पदमंकुरु नावइ बहु पुन्नई Bhavika. अंकिद (ankidaPage #170

99
भंग
अंकुस Jambuddr. 2.15; रहसोत्थिय-अंकुस ... णेगलक्खणपसत्थ ... करचरणदेस- अकल्लणपहारपरिवज्जिअंग (आसरयणं दुरूहइ) JambuddI. 3.109 (comm. भागे Jambuddi. 3.3; तस्स मन्झदेसभागे एगे वइरामए अंकुसे Jam- अकेलणप्रहारः तर्जनकविशेषाघातैः) buddi. 5.38; 7.1783; तो बंदिऊण पाए चकं कुसलक्खणे मुणिवरस्स अंकेल्लि (ankelli) DesT. m. the Asoka tree, अकेली अ असोए Utt. 9.60.
DeNaMa. 1.7 (comm. अकेल्ली अशोकतरुः, अंकेलितलासीणो मा रम) __अंकस (ankusaPage #171

100
अंगगीभाव
Niya. 1.9.10; दोहि अंगेहिं उप्पीलतेहिं आया जस्स ण उप्पीलति IsiBhas. देसग्गं तेणेव उवागच्छइ Naya 1.15.11; खेत्तारिया अद्धछब्बीस तिदिहा ... 44.1; JM. संमत्तं गाण-तवो-सजम-सहियाई ताई चत्तारि । मोक्ख पहपवण्णाणं रायगिह, मगह, चंपा, अंगा Pannav. 1.102 (37.5); Niraya. 543; JM. चत्तारि इमाई अंगाई KuvMaKa. 56.5%; Apa. अंगई दह विउसविधारि- अंगा नाम जणवओ चंपाउरि सिंग उत्थि सहि जस्स TarVaka(Bha.) 89%; बाई MahaPu.(P.) 10.8.6%3 3 constituent part of a kingdom, अंगाणं रणा राइणो तह लगेण राष्ण (रमंते) Kum.ica.(H.) 4.61%3 JM. सामी रट्र अमचो दुग्गं कोसो बलं य मित्ते य। सत्तेव य अंगाई नीसेसदेसचूडामणी अंगा नाम जणवओ Manoka. 27.183; AkkhaMaKo. • रज्जस्स हवंति एयाई NaPaiKa. 6.114; Apa. अंगई लच्छिहि दोसं. 65%B VasuHi.(M.) 133; 126%; अंगानं दक्खिगेगं गंगा VasuHi. 305.8%B कियाई MahaPu.(P.) 39.7.5.
Apa. अस्थि देसु अंगउ सुपसिद्धउ SudCa.(N.) 2.2.1%3; जिय-कलिंगभंग (anga). 1 body, AMg. (राया) लूहियंगे Jambuddi. बंगंगनायगु SankuCa. 526.3; भणइ गणेसरु अंगद मंडलि 100.1.7. 3.93 वरचंदणचच्चियंगे नरिंदे Jambuddi. 3.221; नहच्छेयणेहिं य अंग अंग (anga) m. name of a monkey warrior, JM. अंगो पच्छाये Viva. 121%3; JM. अच्छइ ता इयरजणो अंगे च्चिय जाइ पंच अंगकुमारो हणुवंतो PaumCa.(V.) 76.73; 89.37; Apa. ताइ मि ६णभूयाई VajLag.933; वियलइ धणं न माणं झिज्जइ अंगं न झिज्जइ पयावो पर किकिधपुर अंगंगय बडूंतई PaumCa.(3.) 12.12.10; अंगंगय-गवयVajLag. 1643; जीहा जलं न मेलइ ण मुणहरसंण फासए अंगे। सो जीवर गवक्ख जेत्थु PaumCa.(S.) 40.15.6%3 42.12.2. सत्त दिणे RitSamu. 141; 25%3; दूरत्यो डहाइ रवी अग्गी अंगेहि फरसिओ अंग (angaPage #172

अंगपंगिमा
सजिधम्मे । जुतं मणुवत्तं ... सनए खिविडं SupāsCa. 10.92(p. 218) अंगचंगमा (anga-cangima Page #173

भंगपडिलेहण
102
अंगमंग
Viy. 11.11.148 (comm. अङ्गमति वारिकाणां मस्तकानि क्षालयति अंगप्पहुदि (anga-ppahudiPage #174

अंगभंगपिन
103
अंगराम
अंग मंगचिध (angamarga-cindhaPage #175

अंगराचा
104
भेगसुब
283 11273 (द्वितीयः वैतालिका) घुसिणों क्षुण्णंगराअंजणं Anasun. पुरिसाइअमड उझिअमंगव लिम्जं च तणुवलणं DENaMi. 1.42 (comm, 3.22%3; Apa. कुंकुमि अंगरागु निरु किजा Manoka. 41. V. 2183; जो अंगवलिज अगवलनम् ) अंगराउ सो मयणमूलु JasCa. 2.12.11; थणअंगरागारुणिउ कमलरेणु- अंगवहित (anga-vahitaPage #176
Serving JinShasan 043005 gyanmandir@kobatirth.org For Private and Personal Use Only